Model SR7001/SR8001 User Guide
AV Surround Receiver
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12. Grounding or Polarization – This product
may be equipped with a polarized
alternatingcurrent line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will
fit into the power outlet only one way. This is
a safety feature. If you are unable to insert
the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the
plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete
outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of
the polarized plug.
16. Lightning – For added protection for this
product during a lightning storm, or when it is
left unattended and unused for long periods
of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This
will prevent damage to the product due to
lightning and power-line surges.
d. If the product does not operate normally by
following the operating instructions. Adjust
only those controls that are covered by
the operating instructions as an improper
adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive
work by a qualified technician to restore the
product to its normal operation.
22. Replacement Parts – When replacement
parts are required, be sure the service
technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the
same characteristics as the original part.
Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire,
electric shock, or other hazards.
17. Power Lines – An outside antenna system
should not be located in the vicinity of
overhead power lines or other electric light or
power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an
outside antenna system, extreme care should
be taken to keep from touching such power
lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
23. Safety Check – Upon completion of any
service or repairs to this product, ask the
service technician to perform safety checks
to determine that the product is in proper
operating condition.
e. If the product has been dropped or damaged
in any way, and
f. When the product exhibits a distinct change
in performance this indicates a need for
service.
24. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The product
should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only
as recommended by the manufacturer.
AC POLARIZED PLUG
25. Heat – The product should be situated away
from heat sources such as radiators, heat
registers, stoves, or other products (including
amplifiers) that produce heat.
13. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords
should be routed so that they are not likely
to be walked on or pinched by items placed
upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience
receptacles, and the point where they exit
from the product.
18. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets,
extension cords, or integral convenience
receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire
or electric shock.
19. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects
of any kind into this product through openings
as they may touch dangerous voltage points
or short-out parts that could result in a fire or
electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind
on the product.
FIGURE 1
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING AS PER
NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE, ANSI/NFPA 70
14. Protective Attachment Plug – The product
is equipped with an attachment plug having
overload protection. This is a safety feature.
See Instruction Manual for replacement or
resetting of protective device. If replacement
of the plug is required, be sure the service
technician has used a replacement plug
specified by the manufacturer that has the
same overload protection as the original plug.
20. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this
product yourself as opening or removing
covers may expose you to dangerous voltage
or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
ANTENNA
LEAD IN WIRE
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810-20)
21. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this
product from the wall outlet and refer
servicing to qualified service personnel under
the following conditions:
15. Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside
antenna or cable system is connected to the
product, be sure the antenna or cable system
is grounded so as to provide some protection
against voltage surges and built-up static
charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical
Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information
with regard to proper grounding of the mast
and supporting structure, grounding of the
lead-in wire to an antenna-discharge unit,
size of grounding conductors, location
of antennadischarge unit, connection to
grounding electrodes, and requirements for
the grounding electrode. See Figure 1.
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810-21)
a. When the power-supply cord or plug is
damaged.
b. If liquid has been spilled, or objects have
fallen into the product.
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250, PART H)
GROUND CLAMPS
c. If the product has been exposed to rain or
water.
NEC - NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la Classe B est conforme
à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6 ACOUSTIC EQ ............................................................38
INTRODUCTION ....................................2
PRECAUTIONS......................................2
DESCRIPTION .......................................2
FEATURES.............................................5
ACCESSORIES......................................5
MULTI ROOM SYSTEM.......................56
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI ROOM
OUT TERMINALS.............................................................56
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI SPEAKER
TERMINALS .....................................................................56
OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS WITH
THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A.....................57
BASIC OPERATION (PLAY BACK).....40
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE...................................40
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE...........................40
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME ..................................40
NIGHT MODE...................................................................40
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)
FRONT PANEL ......................................6
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER...........................................7
CONTROL ........................................................................40
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE.....................40
VIDEO CONVERT............................................................41
I/P CONVERT...................................................................41
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND .................41
USING THE SLEEP TIMER.............................................41
REMOTE CONTROLLER
REAR PANEL.........................................8
OPERATION....................................58
CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS .................58
BASIC OPERATION.........................................................60
PROGRAMMING MACROS ............................................63
CLONE MODE..................................................................65
SETUP..............................................................................66
REMOTE CONTROLLER RC8001SR ...9
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS................................................9
LCD INDICATORS............................................................10
REMOTE CONTROL RANGE .........................................11
LOADING BATTERIES.....................................................11
BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL...........................11
SETTING THE TIME ........................................................11
GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO SR7001....12
SURROUND MODE .............................42
SURROUND.....................................................................42
SOURCE DIRECT ...........................................................42
PURE DIRECT ................................................................42
TROUBLESHOOTING .........................67
HDMI.................................................................................68
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................................68
OTHER FUNCTION..............................46
TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION........................................46
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL ................46
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES .........................46
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE .........................................46
VIDEO ON/OFF................................................................46
DISPLAY MODE...............................................................47
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR
CONNECTIONS ...................................13
SPEAKER PLACEMENT .................................................13
CONNECTING SPEAKERS.............................................13
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS..........................14
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS..........................16
ADVANCED CONNECTING ............................................17
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS.........17
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS.................18
XM RADIO OVERVIEW ...................................................19
CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS..........69
DIMENSIONS ......................................69
SETUP CODES .......................................I
DIRECT BUTTON FUNCTIONS .......... VI
DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT ...................................................47
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE.............................47
SPEAKER A/B ..................................................................48
7.1 CH INPUT...................................................................48
AUX2 INPUT.....................................................................48
LIP.SYNC..........................................................................48
ANTENNA.........................................................................19
CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM........................20
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT.............................21
SETUP ..................................................22
ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM.........................22
1 INPUT SETUP .............................................................24
2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP..........................................27
3 SURROUND SETUP ...................................................33
4 VIDEO SETUP .............................................................35
5 PREFERENCE ............................................................36
BASIC OPERATION (TUNER).............49
LISTENING TO THE TUNER...........................................49
PRESET MEMORY..........................................................50
LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO..........................52
SEARCH MODE...............................................................53
PRESET MEMORY..........................................................54
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THX need not be activated for music, movies
made especially for TV, or shows such as sports
programming, talk shows, etc.
This is because they were originally mixed for a small
room environment.
INTRODUCTION
PRECAUTIONS
DO NOT LOCATE IN THE FOLLOWING PLACES
DESCRIPTION
Thank you for purchasing the Marantz SR7001
Surround receiver.
To ensure long-lasting use, do not locate the SR7001
where it is:
• Exposed to direct sunlight.
This remarkable component has been engineered
to provide you with many years of home theater
enjoyment. Please take a few minutes to read this
manual thoroughly before you connect and operate
the SR7001.
Asthereareanumberofconnectionandconfiguration
options, you are encouraged to discuss your own
particular home theater setup with your Marantz A/V
specialist dealer.
THX and Select 2 are trademarks of THX Ltd. THX
may be registered in some jurisdictions. Surround
EX is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories. Used with
permission.
THX® is an exclusive set of standards and
technologies established by the world-renowned film
production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX resulted
from George Lucas’ desire to reproduce the movie
soundtrack as faithfully as possible both in the movie
theater and in the home theater.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from a movie theater
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur.
When the THX mode of the SR7001 is on, three
distinct THX technologies are automatically added:
Re-Equalization-restores the correct tonal balance
for watching a movie in a home environment.
These sounds are otherwise mixed to be brighter
for a large movie theater. Re-EQ compensates for
this and prevents the soundtracks from being overly
bright and harsh when played in a home theater.
Timbre Matching-filters the information going to the
surround speakers so they more closely match the
tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the
front speakers.
This ensures seamless panning between the front
and surround speakers.
Adaptive Decorrelation-slightly changes one
surround channel’s time and phase relationship with
respect to the other surround channel.
This expands the listening position and creates with
only two surround speakers the same spacious
surround experience as in a movie theater with
multiple surround speakers.
• Near sources of heat such as heaters.
•
In highly humid or poorly ventilated environments.
• Dusty.
• Subjected to mechanical vibrations.
• On wobbly, inclined or otherwise unstable
surfaces.
THX Surround EX—Dolby DIgital Surround EX is a
joint development of Dolby Laboratories and THX
Ltd.
This user guide covers the SR7001 and
SR8001, though the SR7001 is given for the
title. Explanations of features belonging
only to the SR8001 are indicated as “SR8001
only”.
• In locations such as in cramped audio racks
where radiated heat is blocked. To ensure proper
heat radiation, ensure the below clearance from
walls and other equipment.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology
are able to reproduce an extra channel which has
been added during the mixing of the program. This
channel, called Surround Back, places sounds
behind the listener in addition to the currently
available front left, front center, front right, surround
right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This
additional channel provides the opportunity for more
detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more
depth, spacious ambience and sound localization
than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology, when released into the
home consumer market may exhibit wording to that
effect on the packaging. A list of movies created
using this technology can be found on the Dolby
software titles encoded with this technology an be
Above
8 inchs (20 cm)
or more
XM Satellite Radio Ready
Left
8 inchs (20 cm)
or more
Right
8 inchs (20 cm)
or more
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
UT
A
UT
O
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG
DIGITAL
ROUND
DIGITAL
SLEEP
A
O
SURR
MT
X
6
.
1
N
I
G
H
T
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
A
AC
P
C
M
SL
SR
DSD
DOWN
UP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
Rear
8 inchs (20 cm)
or more
The XM name and related logos are registered
trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the
THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround
EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology
in the home. This product may also engage the
THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1
channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround
EX eocnded. In such case, the information delivered
to the Surround Back channel will be program
dependent and may or may not be very pleasing
depending on the particular soundtrack and the
tastes of the individual listener.
The Marantz SR7001 was required to pass a rigorous
series of quality and performance tests, in addition to
incorporating the technologies explained above, in
order to be THX certified by Lucasfilm Ltd.
THXrequirementscovereveryaspectofperformance
including pre-amplifier and power amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
Movies which have been encoded in Dolby Digital,
DTS, Dolby Pro Logic, stereo and Mono will all
benefit from the THX mode when being viewed.
The THX mode should only be activated when
watching movies which were originally produced for
a movie theater environment.
“SURROUND EX™” is a trademark of Dolby
Laboratories. Used under authorization.
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THX Select2
Neo:6 offers several important improvements as
follow,
• Neo:6 provides up to six full-band channels of
matrix decoding from stereo matrix material. Users
with 6.1 and 5.1 systems will derive six and five
separate channels, respectively, corresponding to
the standard home-theater speaker layouts.
When DVD-video appeared, it became possible to
deliver 24-bit, 96 kHz audio into the home, but only in
two channels, and with serious limitations on picture.
This capability has had little use.
DVD-audio allows 96/24 in six channels, but a
new player is needed, and only analog outputs are
provided, necessitating the use of the D/A converters
and analog electronics provided in the player.
Dolby Digital EX creates six full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done
using a matrix decoder that derives three surround
channels from the two in the original recording. For
best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with
movies soundtracks recorded with Dolby Digital
Surround EX.
Before any home theater component can be THX
Select2 certified, it must pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a
product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your
guarantee that the Home Theater products you
purchase will give you superb performance for many
years to come. THX Select2 requirements define
hundreds of parameters, including power amplifier
performance, and pre-amplifier performance and
operation for both digital and analog domains. THX
Select2 receivers also feature proprietary THX
technologies
• Neo:6 technology allows various sound elements
within a channel or channels to be steered
separately, and in a way which follows naturally
from the original presentation.
About Dolby Pro Logic IIx
DTS 96/24 offers the following:
1. Sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx technology delivers a natural
and immersing 7.1-channel listening experience
to the home theater environment. A product of
Dolby's expertise in surround sound and matrix
decoding technologies, Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a
complete surround sound solution that maximizes
the entertainment experience from stereo as well as
5.1-channel encoded sources.
• Neo:6 offers a music mode to expand stereo
nonmatrix recordings into the five- or six-channel
layout,inawaywhichdoesnotdiminishthesubtlety
and integrity of the original stereo recording.
2. Full backward compatibility with all existing
decoders. (Existing decoders will output a 48 kHz
signal)
(e.g., THX Mode) which accurately translate movie
soundtracks for home theater playback.
3. No new player required: DTS 96/24 can be carried
on DVD-video, or in the video zone of DVD-audio,
accessible to all DVD players.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is fully compatible with Dolby
Surround Pro Logic technology and can optimally
decode the thousands of commercially available
Dolby Surround encoded video cassettes and
television programs with enhanced depth and
spatiality. It can also process any high-quality
stereo or Advanced Resolution 5.1-channel music
content into a seamless 6.1- or 7.1-channel listening
experience.
4. 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video, for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD-video.
DTS-ES Extended Surround is a new multichannel
digital signal format developed by Digital Theater
Systems Inc. While offering high compatibility with
the conventional DTS Digital Surround format, DTS-
ES Extended Surround greatly improves the 360-
degree surround impression and space expression
thanks to further expanded surround signals. This
format has been used professionally in movie
theaters since 1999.
In addition to the 5.1 surround channels (FL, FR, C,
SL, SR and LFE), DTS-ES Extended Surround also
offers the SB (Surround Back) channel for surround
playback with a total of 6.1 channels. DTS-ES
Extended Surround includes two signal formats with
different surround signal recording methods, as DTS-
ES Discrete 6.1 and DTS-ES Matrix 6.1.
DTS was introduced in 1994 to provide 5.1 channels
of discrete digital audio into home theater systems.
DTSbringsyoupremiumqualitydiscretemultichannel
digital sound to both movies and music.
DTS is a multichannel sound system designed to
create full range digital sound reproduction.
The no compromise DTS digital process sets the
standard of quality for cinema sound by delivering
an exact copy of the studio master recordings to
neighborhood and home theaters.
“DTS” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
Dolby Digital identifies the use of Dolby Digital audio
coding for such consumer formats as DVD and DTV.
As with film sound, Dolby Digital can provide up
to five full-range channels for left, center, and right
screen channels, independent left and right surround
channels, and a sixth (“.1”) channel for low-frequency
effects.
Now, every moviegoer can hear the sound exactly as
the moviemaker intended.
DTS can be enjoyed in the home for either movies or
music on of DVD’s, LD’s, and CD’s.
The Dolby Headphone technology provides a
surround sound listening experience over headphones.
When listening to multichannel content such as DVD
movies over headphones, the listening experience
is fundamentally different than listening to speakers.
Since the headphone speaker drivers are covering
the pinna of the ear, the listening experience differs
greatly from traditional speaker playback. Dolby
utilizes patented headphone perspective curves to
solve this problem and provides a non-fatiguing,
immersive, home theater listening experience. Dolby
Headphone also delivers exceptional 3D audio from
stereo material.
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Surround” are registered
trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES and “Neo:6” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
Dolby Surround Pro Logic II is an improved matrix
decoding technology that provides better spatiality
and directionality on Dolby Surround program
material; provides a convincing three-dimensional
soundfield on conventional stereo music recordings;
and is ideally suited to bring the surround experience
to automotive sound. While conventional surround
programming is fully compatible with Dolby Surround
Pro Logic II decoders, soundtracks will be able to be
encoded specifically to take full advantage of Pro
Logic II playback, including separate left and right
surround channels. (Such material is also compatible
with conventional Pro Logic decoders.)
The advantages of discrete multichannel systems
over matrix are well known.
The stereo CD is a 16-bit medium with sampling at
44.1 kHz. Professional audio has been 20- or 24-
bit for some time, and there is increasing interest
in higher sampling rates both for recording and for
delivery into the home. Greater bit depths provide
extended dynamic range. Higher sampling rates
allow wider frequency response and the use of anti-
alias and reconstruction filters with more favorable
aural characteristics.
Buteveninhomesequippedfordiscretemultichannel,
thereremainsaneedforhigh-qualitymatrixdecoding.
This is because of the large library of matrix surround
motion pictures available on disc and on VHS tape;
and analog television broadcasts.
The typical matrix decoder of today derives a center
channel and a mono surround channel from two-
channel matrix stereo material. It is better than a
simple matrix in that it includes steering logic to
improve separation, but because of its mono, band-
limited surround it can be disappointing to users
accustomed to discrete multichannel.
DTS 96/24 allows for 5.1channel sound tracks to be
encoded at a rate of 96kHz/24bits on DVD-Video
titles.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
of-phase relative to the others. It measures the
distance to each loudspeaker from the main listening
position and adjusts the delays so that sound from
each loudspeaker arrives at the same time. Finally,
Audyssey MuitEQ determines the playback level of
each loudspeaker and adjusts the volume trims so
that all levels are equal.
There are several factors that can degrade the sound
from even the best loudspeakers in a listening room.
One of the most important is the interaction of sound
from the loudspeakers with large surfaces such as
walls, the floor, and the ceiling in the room. Even
with careful loudspeaker placement and acoustical
treatments, there are significant problems that are
caused by room acoustics. These include reflections
from nearby surfaces and standing waves that are
created between large parallel surfaces in the room.
In a home theater the situation is further complicated
because there are several listening locations. The
effects of room acoustics on the sound arriving at
each person’s ears are very different and the result is
a listening experience that is degraded in a different
way for every person in the room. It is not uncommon
to have variations in two adjacent seats that are as
large as 10 dB, particularly in the frequency range
below 250 Hz.
The solution to this problem is to apply room correction
after precisely measuring how each loudspeaker
interacts with the room. Because the room causes
variations in the frequency response of the
loudspeakers that are so large from seat to seat, it
is important to measure each loudspeaker at several
locations in the listening room. This should be done
even if there is only one listener. Measurement at a
single location is not representative of the acoustical
problems in the room and will in most cases, degrade
overall performance. Audyssey MultEQ is the only
technology that can achieve room correction for
multiple listeners in a large listening area. It does so
by combining the data collected at several points in
the room from each loudspeaker and then applying
correction that minimizes the acoustical effects of
the room and is matched to the frequency resolution
of human perception (known as psychoacoustics).
Furthermore, MultEQ correction is applied both
in frequency and time domains and so there are
no artifacts (such as smearing of sound or modal
ringing)that are sometimes associated with traditional
methods of room equalization.
Dolby Virtual Speaker is a technologycertified
by Dolby Laboratories that creates a virtualized
surround sound experience from two speakers using
a multichannel Dolby Digital source. Additionally,
Dolby Virtual Speaker can simulate the surround
sound effect produced by Dolby Pro Logic or Dolby
Pro Logic II.
Dolby Virtual Speaker retains all the original
Multichannel audio information and provides the
listener with the sensation of being surrounded by
additional speakers.
HDCD® (High Definition Compatible Digital ®) is a
patented process for delivering on Compact Disc the
full richness and details of the original microphone
feed.
HDCD encoded CDs sound better because they are
encoded with 20-bits of real musical information as
compared to 16-bits for all other CDs.
HDCD overcomes the limitation of the 16-bit CD
format by using a sophisticated system to encode
the additional four bits onto the CD while remaining
completely compatible with the CD format.
When listening to HDCD recordings, you hear more
dynamic range, a focused 3-D sound stage, and
extremely natural vocal and musical timbre. With
HDCD, you get the body, depth and emotion of the
original performance not a flat, digital imitation.
HDCD system manufactured under license from
Microsoft. This product is covered by one or more
of the following: In the United States 5,479,168
5,638,074 5,640,161 5,808,574 5,838,274 5,854,600
5,864,311 5,872,531 and in Australia 669,114 with
other patents pending.
MultEQ and the Audyssey MultEQ logo are
trademarks of Audyssey Laboratories, Inc. All rights
reserved.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, “Surround EX”, and the double-
D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Circle Surround II (CS-II) is a powerful and versatile
multichannel technology. CS-II is designed to enable
up to 6.1 multichannel surround sound playback
from mono, stereo, CS encoded sources and other
matrix encoded sources. In all cases the decoder
extends it into 6 channels of surround audio and a
LFE/subwoofer signal. The CS-II decoder creates a
listening environment that places the listener “inside”
music performances and dramatically improves
both hi-fi audio conventional surround-encoded
video material. CS-II provides composite stereo rear
channels to greatly improve separation and image
positioning– adding a heightened sense of realism to
both audio and A/V productions.
CS-II is packed with other useful feature like dialog
clarity (SRS Dialog) for movies and cinema-like bass
enrichment (TruBass). CS-II can enable the dialog
to become clearer and more discernable in movies
and it enables the bass frequencies contained in
the original programming to more closely achieve
low frequencies–overcoming the low frequency
limitations of the speakers by full octave.
HDMI, the
and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of
HDMI Licensing LLC.
Inadditiontocorrectingfrequencyresponseproblems
over a wide listening area, Audyssey MultEQ
provides a completely automated sound system set-
up process. It identifies how many loudspeakers are
connected to the amplifiers and whether they are full-
range, satellites, or subwoofers. If there is a least one
subwoofer connected, Audyssey MultEQ determines
the optimum crossover frequency between each
satellite and the subwoofer(s). It automatically
checks the polarity of each loudspeaker and alerts
the user if there are any that may be wired out-
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
Circle Surround II, Dialog Clarity and TruBass
technology are incorporated under license from SRS
Labs, Inc.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The new generation of Marantz Receivers is stylish
and completely symmetrical. On the front panel of
the SR7001, buttons are kept to a minimum. Source
selectors and volume controls are intuitively placed.
The SR7001 is here to perform in your unrivaled home
entertainment setup.
• Front Optical AUX Input
(Digital Camera, Portable DVD)
• Programmable, learning remote control
• Video convert system
HDMI ← Component Video ↔
S-Video ↔ Composit Video
• Video I/P Converter
• Assignable Video Input
• Lip Sync (Audio Delay)
• Digital Radio Interface (XM ready)
• Function Rename
• HDCD
• Dolby Headphone
• Bi-amp drive
• Source/Pure Direct mode
• 9 bands x 7 ch GEQ
Microphone
FEATURES
The SR7001 incorporates the latest generation of
digital surround sound decoding technology such as
Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES (Discrete 6.1
and Matrix 6.1), DTS Neo:6 (Cinema, Music), Dolby
Pro-Logic II (Movie, Music and Game), Dolby Pro-
Logic IIx (Movie, Music and Game), Circle Surround
II (Cinema, Music and Mono).
• HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is an
enhancement to the DVI (Digital Visual Interface)
standard. It adds capabilities for digitally transmitting
audio signals in addition to video signals. Where
multiple cables were previously needed for audio/
video, HDMI enables audio/video connection via a
single cable.
The HDMI input jacks of this receiver support HDMI
Ver. 1.2. and the HDMI output jacks of this transmitter
support HDMI Ver. 1.1.
In addition, Marantz has focused on the future. By
utilizing pre-out jacks, 7.1 direct inputs and a RS-
232C communication port, the SR7001 is tomorrow’s
technology, today!
AC cable
• THX Select 2 certified
7ch amplifiers have enough power for even the most
difficult conditions found in large rooms.
Enormous power reserves endow the system with
substantial dynamic ability at high sound levels.
110 watts (SR7001) / 125 watts (SR8001) to each of
the 7 main channels the power amp section features
an advanced, premium high-storage power supply
capacitors, and fully discrete output stages housed
in cast aluminum heat sinks .
• DSD direct conversion
• DSD to PCM converter
• Two component monitor outputs
• Assignable DC Trigger Output
• Troidal Core Transformer (SR8001 only)
• Selectable Multi Room Component Video output
(SR8001 only)
AAA-size batteries × 3
Ver. 1.2 supports 1-bit audio formatting and enables
transmission of DSD (Direct Stream Digital) signals
of Super Audio CD.
Copyright Protection
• Flasher Input
This receiver supports HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection). HDCP is copyright protection
technology that consists of data encoding and other
device authentication. Its purpose is to protect digital
video content. Both this receiver and the connected
component (such as a video player or monitor) must
support HDCP. Before connecting a component to
this receiver, refer to its instruction manual.
• IR Recever Input (SR8001 only)
• Emitter Output (SR8001 only)
• Multi Room B output (SR8001 only)
AM Loop Antenna
The SR7001 incorporates the most advanced
Digital Signal Processing circuitry, along with a
Crystal® 192 kHz/24 bit D/A converter in each of
the 7 channels. Independent power supply circuits
are incorporated for the FL display, audio and
video sections for maximum separation, clarity
and dynamic range. Together with hand-selected
customized components, all elements work in
harmony to recreate the emotion, exactly as the artist
had intended.
ACCESSORIES
Remote Controller RC8001SR
FM Antenna
• THX / THX Surround EX
• Dolby Digital EX, Dolby Digital, DTS ES
(Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1, Neo:6)
• Dolby Pro Logic II (Movie, Music, Game)
• Dolby Pro Logic IIx (Movie, Music, Game)
• Circle Surround II (Cinema, Music, Mono)
• Audyssey Mult EQ
• 7 × 110 Watts (8 Ohms), Discrete Amplifiers
(SR8001: 7 × 125 Watts)
• High Power Current Feedback Circuitry
• Massive Energy Power Supply, Huge EI
Transformer, Large ELCO’s.
• 192 kHz/24 bit DAC for all 8 Channels
• 32 bit Digital Surround Processing Chipsets
• Video Off Mode
• Large Heavy Duty Speaker Terminals for all
Channels
• RS-232C Terminal for Future Upgrade or System
Control
POWER
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
SOURCE
M
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
The SR7001 is designed and engineered with
extensive feedback from custom installation experts,
dealers and consumers. It features multi-room/
multisource, assignable DC trigger, a RS-232C
communication port, Flasher input, heavy duty
speaker binding posts and an extensive array of both
analog and digital inputs / outputs. With 6 assignable
digital inputs (7 total), 4 component inputs, Super
Audio CD Multi Channel (7.1 channel) direct inputs,
video convert system and a speaker-B and OSD
output versatility is taken to a stunning new level.
Furthermore, the SR7001 can output the OSD
information through the Y/C (S-video) and composite
video outputs.
CH
VOL
Front AUX Jack Cover
OK
PPUUSSHH
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
0
User Guide
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
AUX1
LIGHT
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
•
Set Up Menu via all Video Output
(Composite, S-Video, Component video and
HDMI)
An easy-to-use programmable, learning remote
control allows full access to all of the operating
functions and can be used for system operation as
well.
• Auto Input Signal Detection
Warranty Card
USA × 1
• Improved Station Name Input Method, 60 Presets
• AutoAdjustFunctionforSpeakerDistanceSettings
(Delay Time)
Canada × 1
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
u
MULTI SPEAKER button
!
PURE DIRECT button and indicator
FRONT PANEL
Press this button to activate the Multiroom Speaker
system. “MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the
display. (See page 56)
When this button is pressed once, “SOURCE
DIRECT” appears on the FL display. If pressed
again, “PURE DIRECT” appears. After 2 seconds,
the FL display indication goes out.
In the source/pure direct mode, the tone control
circuitry and bass management are bypassed.
q
w
e rtyu
io!!
!
!
!
i
BAND button
Press this button to switch between FM, AM and XM
(XM Ready) in the TUNER mode.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
Notes:
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
• The surround mode is automatically switched to
AUTO when the pure direct function is turned on.
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
o
T-MODE button
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MTX 6.1
NIGHT
EQ
• Additionally, speaker configurations are fixed
automatically as follows.
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
Press this button to select the auto stereo mode or
mono mode when the FM band is selected.
The “AUTO” indicator lights in the auto stereo mode.
(See page 49)
DOWN
UP
Front SPKR = LARGE
Center SPKR = LARGE
Surround SPKR = LARGE
Surround Back SPKR = LARGE
Sub woofer = YES
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
!
MEMORY button
Press this button to enter the tuner preset memory
numbers or station names. (See page 50, 54)
!
THX button
Press this button to select THX processing for input
source.
!
CLEAR button
Press this button to cancel the station-memory setting
mode or preset scan tuning. (See page 51, 55)
!! ! ! ! @@ @@
!
7.1CH INPUT button
Press this button to select the output of an external
multichannel player.
!
INFRARED receiving sensor window
Notes:
q
POWER switch and STANDBY indicator
This window receives infrared signals for the remote
control.
!
MENU button
When this switch is pressed once, the unit turns ON
and the display illuminates. When pressed again, the
unit turns OFF and the STANDBY indicator will be
illuminated.
• When using headphones, the surround mode will
change to STEREO and Dolby Headphone by
MENU and Cursor button.
This button is used to enter the SETUP MAIN
MENU.
!
VOLUME control knob
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting
as soon as the headphone plug is removed from the
jack.
Adjusts the overall sound level. Turning the control
clockwise increases the sound level.
!
Cursor (5, ∞,
2
,
3
)
/ ENTER button
Use these buttons when operating the SETUP MAIN
MENU and TUNER function.
w
INPUT SELECTOR knob (AUDIO/ VIDEO)
This knob is used to select the input sources.
The video function selectors, such as TV, DVD,
VCR1, DSS and AUX1 select video and audio
simultaneously.
Audio function sources such as TAPE, CD/CDR,
TUNER and AUX2 may be selected in conjunction
with a Video source.
This feature (Sound Injection) combines a sound
from one source with a picture from another.
Choose the video source first, and then choose a
different audio source to activate this function.
r
SURROUND MODE button
!
AUX1 INPUT jacks
You can select the surround mode by pressing this
button.
These auxiliary video/audio input jacks accept the
connections of a camcorder, portable DVD, game
etc. When not using these jacks, protect with the
included jack covers.
@
EXIT button
This button is used to exit from the SETUP MAIN
MENU.
t
AUTO (Auto surround) button
Press this button to select the AUTO mode from
the surround modes. When this mode is selected,
the receiver determines the surround mode
corresponding to a digital input signal automatically.
@
DISPLAY button
How to Attach the Front AUX Jack Cover
When this button is pressed, the FL display mode
is changed as Input display → Surround Mode →
Auto-display Off → Display Off → Function name
display and the display off indicator (DISP) lights up
is condition DISPLAY OFF.
U
P
DIGITAL
S-VIDEO
AUX
1
INPUT
y
MULTI (Multi Room) button
VIDEO
e
HEADPHONE jack for stereo headphones
L
Press this button to activate the Multiroom system.
“MULTI” indicator will be illuminated in the display.
(See page 56)
AUDIO
This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s
output through a pair of headphones. Be certain
that the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo
phono plug. Note that the main room speakers will
automatically be turned off when the headphone jack
is in use.
R
@
MultEQ button / MIC jack
PPUUSSHH
Press to automatically measure speaker characteristics
using the included microphone. (See page 28)
Front AUX Jack Cover
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ES
@
SPEAKER A/B button
FL DISPLAY AND INDICATER
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS ES signal
is input.
96/24
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS 96/24 signal
is input.
PCM
This indicator is illuminated when the input signal is
PCM (pulse code modulation).
2 SURROUND
Press this button to select speaker systems A and/or
B.
s
f
h
k
l
¡
¡
¡
¡
a
d
g
j
¡
Opening and closing the front panel door
When you want to use the controls behind the front
panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the
lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when
not using these controls.
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST
V
–
OFF NIGHT PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
DISC 6.1 MTX 6.1 SPKR AB
C
LFE
S
L
R
PCM
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Surround
SL
SR
signal is input.
AV SURROUND RE
IN
P
U
T
S
E
L
E
¡ ¡
¡
¡
™
¡
™
C
CE
T
IVE
R SR7001
O
R
¡
ENCODED CHANNEL STATUS indicators
These indicators display the channels that are
encoded with a digital
D
S
IS
ST
E
P
AN
DB
M
UL
Y
L
E
T
E
I
P
P
A
U
O
A
T
W
U
O
T
O
R
S
a
DISP (Display Off) indicator
k
NIGHT mode indicator
O
U
T
U
N
R
R
N
/O
E
D
F
F
D
IR
E
S
T
C
T
S
P
K
D
R
IS
A
C
B
6
.1
V
-O
F
MT
F
X
P
E
6
.
1
A
H
K
N
A
T
IG
PHONES
T
T
A
N
A
L
O
D
G
IG
IT
A
L
This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in
the display off condition.
This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in
the Night mode, which reduces the dynamic range of
digital program material at low volume levels.
S
U
R
R
O
input signal. If the selected digital input signal is
Dolby Digital 5.1ch or DTS 5.1ch, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”,
“SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.If the digital input
signal is 2 channel PCM-audio, “L” and “R” will be
displayed.
If Dolby Digital 5.1ch signal with Surround EX flag
or DTS-ES signal comes in, “L”, “C”, “R”, “SL”, “S” ,
“SR” and “LFE” will be illuminated.
U
L
A
A
D
ND
IG
C
IT
A
P
C
M
L
C
LF
R
SL
E
S
SR
V
O
L
U
M
E
DOWN
R
E
A
D
Y
UP
D
IG
IT
AL
s
SLEEP timer indicator
S-VI
DE
A
U
X
O
1
IN
P
UT
ID
V
EO
L
A
U
DIO
R
This indicator is illuminated when the sleep timer
function in the main-room is in use.
l
SPKR (speaker) AB indicator
Active speaker system will be illuminated by this
indicator.
d
Multi-room system indicator
Caution:
This indicator is illuminated when the multi-room
system is active.
¡
PEAK indicator
• Be careful not to pinch your fingers between the
door and the panel.
¡
Main Information Display
This indicator is a monitor for an analog audio input
signal. If the selected analog audio input signal is
greater than the capable level of internal processing,
this will illuminate. If this happens, you should press
the ATT button on the remote. (See page 9)
This display shows messages relating to the status,
input source, surround mode, tuner, volume level or
other aspects of unit’s operation.
f
AUTO SURR
(Auto Surround mode) indicator
This indicator is illuminated to show that the AUTO
SURROUND mode is in use.
¡
SOURCE DIRECT indicator
This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in
the SOURCE DIRECT mode.
¡
ATT (Attenuation) indicator
This indicator is illuminated when the attenuation
function is active.
g
TUNER’s indicators
AUTO : This indicator illuminates when the
tuner’s Auto mode is in use.
¡
DSD indicator
This indicator illuminates when a DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) signal of an Super Audio CD is input via the
audio signal included in the HDMI input signal.
¡
DIGITAL Input Indicator
TUNED : This indicator illuminates when
a station is being received with
sufficient signal strength to provide
acceptable listening quality.
This indicator lights when a digital input has been
selected.
¡
PURE DIRECT indicator
ST(Stereo) : This indicator illuminates when an
FM station is being tuned into stereo
condition.
¡
ANALOG input indicator
This indicator is illuminated when the SR7001 is in
the PURE DIRECT mode.
This indicator is illuminated when an analog input
source has been selected.
™
HDCD indicator
h
DTS-ES mode indicators (DISC6.1, MTX6.1)
These indicators will illuminate to show the DTS-ES
decoding mode (Discrete 6.1 or Matrix 6.1).
¡
SIGNAL FORMAT indicators
When HDCD signal is decoded, this indicator will
light up.
2 DIGITAL
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital
signal is input.
EX
™
HDMI indicator
j
V (video)-OFF mode indicator
This indicator is illuminated when a Dolby Digital EX
signal is input.
dts
This indicator illuminates when an HDMI device is
connected to the input and a link is established.
This indicator is illuminated when the Video-OFF
function is active.
This indicator is illuminated when a DTS signal is
input.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
y
XM terminal
!
Preamp Outputs
REAR PANEL
See page 19 for connecting information.
(L, R, SL, SR, SBL, SBR, C)
Jacks for L (front left), R (front right), C (Center), SL
(surround left), SR (surround right), SBL (surround
back left) and SBR (surround back right).
Use these jacks for connection to external power
amplifiers.
q
w
e
r
tyu
i
u
Sub Speaker outputs terminals
(MULTI SPEAKER / SPEAKER C)
Two terminals are provided for the front left, and right
speakers for multi room.
The terminals can be used to connect a third set of
speakers by setting the SPEAKER C selector switch
to ON. For connection and use, see page 20.
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
SURROUND
BACK
SPEAKER
SYSTEMS
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
L
R
L
!
Subwoofer Output
RS-232C
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM ANTENNA
FRONT
A
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
/
CR
/
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
Y
/
/
Y
/
PB
Connect this jack to the line level input of a powered
subwoofer. If an external subwoofer amplifier is used,
connect this jack to the subwoofer amplifier input.
If you are using two subwoofers, either powered or
with a 2 channel subwoofer amplifier, connect a “Y”
connector to the subwoofer output jack and run one
cable from it to each subwoofer amplifier.
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PB
P
R
PB
P
R
PR
(
INPUT 3 VCR1
)
(
INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2
)
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
( ) ( )
INPUT 3 VCR1 INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
HDMI
Ver1.2
@
@
@
XM
AC IN
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
FRONT
B
i
Speaker outputs terminals
R
R
Nine terminals are provided for the front (A) left, front
(A) right, front (B) left, front (B) right, front center,
surround left, surround right, surround back left and
surround back right speakers.
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEAKER
1
2
CEN
TER
OFF
5
6
COAX.
IN
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
PRE
OUT
IN
IN
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
2
1
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
L
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
SURR.
L
R
7.1CH
IN
!
7.1 CHANNEL or AUX2 INPUT
@
R
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.
SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS
FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS
o
SPEAKER C switch
By connecting a DVD Audio player, Super Audio CD
multichannel player, or other components that has a
multichannel port, you can playback the audio with
5.1 channel or 7.1 channel outputs.
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
Set to ON to connect a bi-amp to this receiver or set
to OFF for normal speaker connection (surround
back and multiroom speakers). (See page 20)
@!
!! !e!! ! ! ! ! o
!
AC OUTLETS
!
EMITTER OUT (SR8001 only)
Connect the AC power cables of components such as
a DVD and CD player to these outlets. SWITCHED and
UNSWITCHED outlets are provided.
The one marked SWITCHED provides power only
when the SR7001 is turned on and is useful for
components which you use every time you play your
system.
The one marked UNSWITCHED is always live as
long as the SR7001 is plugged into a live outlet.
A component connected here may be left on
permanently, or may be switched off with via its own
power switch.
The signals input to the IR RECEIVER IN terminals
are output to this terminal. External devices can be
controlled by connecting them to this terminal.
q
FM antenna terminal (75 ohms)
e
Multiroom Outputs (Audio output
A/B,Video)
Connect an external FM antenna with a coaxial
cable, or a cable network FM source.
These are the audio and video output jacks for the
Multi zone (Multi room).
!
IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 only)
AM antenna and ground terminals
Connect the supplied AM loop antenna. Use the
terminals marked “AM” and “GND”. The supplied AM
loop antenna will provide good AM reception in most
areas. Position the loop antenna until you hear the
best reception.
Connect to an external IR receiver.
Connect these jacks to optional audio power
amplifiers or video display devices to listen and view
the source selected by the multiroom system in a
remote room.
!
FLASHER IN (Flasher input terminal)
These terminals are to control the unit from each
zone. Connect the control signal from a Keypad, etc.
r
MONITOR OUT
Caution:
These are monitor outputs and each one includes
both composite video and S-video configurations.
When connecting two video monitors or televisions,
be aware that the OSD interface can be used with
both MONITOR OUT connections.
w
COMPONENT VIDEO INPUT/
OUTPUT
• In order to avoid potential turn-off thumps, anything
plugged into these outlets should be powered up
before the SR7001 is turned on.
!
DC TRIGGER output terminal
Connect a device that needs to be triggered by DC
under certain conditions (screen, power strip, etc…)
Use the system OSD setup menu to determine the
conditions by which these jack will be active.
If your DVD player or other device has component
video connectors, be sure to connect them to these
component video connectors on the SR7001. The
SR7001 has 4 component video input connectors to
• The capacity of this AC outlet is 150W. Do not
connect devices that consume electricity more than
the capacity of these AC outlets. If the total power
consumption of the connected devices exceeds the
capacity, the protection circuit shuts down the power
supply.
Note:
B
R
obtain the color information (Y, C , C ) directly from
the recorded DVD signal or other video component
and two component video outputs connector to
output it directly into the matrix decoder of the display
device.
By sending the pure DVD component video signal
directly, the DVD signal forgoes the extra processing
that normally would degrade the image. The result is
vastly increased image quality, with incredibly life like
colors and crisp detail.
t
RS-232C
• This output voltage is for (status) control only, It is
not sufficient for drive capability.
The RS-232C port is to be used in conjunction with
an external controller to control the operation of the
SR7001 by using an external device.
The RS-232C port may also be used in the future to
update the operating software of the SR7001 so that
it will be able to support new digital audio formats and
the like as they are introduced.
!
MULTI ROOM REMOTE IN/OUT terminals
IN: Connect to a multi-room remote control
device, available from your Marantz dealer.
!
AC INLET
Plug the supplied power cord into this AC INLET and
then into the power outlet on the wall.
SR7001 can be powered by 120V AC only.
OUT: Connect to the Marantz component equipped
with remote control (RC-5) terminals in Multi
zone (Multi room).
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
z
Infrared Transmitter and Learning
Sensor
,
MUTE button
@
REMOTE CONT. IN/OUT terminals
REMOTE CONTROLLER
RC8001SR
NAMES AND FUNCTIONS
This button is used to mute the audio for the SR7001
and television.
Connect to a Marantz component equipped with
remote control (RC-5) terminals.
This transmitter emits infrared light. Press the
buttons while pointing the transmitter towards the
infrared receiver window of the SR7001 or other
AV equipment. Be sure to also point towards other
remote controls when using the learning function.
Note:
• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the
SR7001.
@
AUDIO IN/OUT (TV, DVD,VCR1,
DSS/VCR2,TAPE, CD/CDR)
These are the analog audio inputs and outputs. There
are 6 audio inputs (4 of which are linked to video
inputs) and 4 audio outputs (2 of which are linked to
video outputs). The audio jacks are nominally labeled
for cassette tape decks, compact disc players, DVD
players and etc.... The audio inputs and outputs
require RCA-type connectors.
.
GUIDE button
z
x
POWER ON and OFF buttons
This button is used to display the menus for the DVD
player, DSS (satellite broadcasting tuner), or other
AV equipment.
(When AMP mode is selected)
These buttons are used to turn the SR7001 on or
off.
(when AMP mode is selected)
This button is used to select the LIP.SYNC mode.
POWER
OFF
ON
ON/OFF
x
SOURCE
c
SOURCE ON/OFF button
@
DIGITAL INPUT (Dig.1 - 6) /
OUTPUT (coaxial, optical)
c
v
This button is used to turn a specific source (such as
a DVD player) on or off independently from the rest
of the system.
⁄
EXIT button
M
(when AMP mode is selected)
This button is used to cancel settings in the setup
menu.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
These are the digital audio inputs and outputs. There
are 3 digital inputs with coaxial jacks, 3 with optical
jacks.
¤
¤
b
n
v
M (Mode) button
The inputs accept digital audio signals from a
compact disc, LD, DVD, or other digital source
component.
For digital output, there is 1 coaxial output and 1
optical output.
The digital outputs can be connected to MD
recorders, CD recorders, DAT decks, or other similar
components.
This button is used to program Macros. Pressing this
button switches between Normal mode and Macro
mode.
The > button is used to move to the next page. Up to
20 programs (4 pages) can be made. Holding down
the M button for three seconds or more switches to
the Setup mode, where the Setup menu is shown on
the LCD. The Setup menu has four pages, and the >
button is used to move to the next page. Pressing the
> button from page 4 returns you to page 1.
⁄
Numeric buttons
These buttons are used to switch between 0 to 9
of the source components. If the source is set to
the amplifier, these buttons are used to perform
operations.
CH
VOL
(when AMP mode is selected)
(1) TEST button
Used to enter the test tone menu.
OK
⁄
⁄
m
@
VIDEO IN/OUT
(2) CH SEL. (channel select) button
Used to call up SETUP MAIN MENU and adjust
speaker levels or 7.1 ch input level.
(TV, DVD,VCR1, DSS/VCR2)
,
.
LIP·SYNC
GUIDE
These are the video inputs and outputs. There
are 4 video inputs and 2 video outputs and each
one includes both composite video and S-video
configurations. Connect VCRs, DVD players, and
other video components to the video inputs.
The 2 video output channels can be used to be
connected to video tape recorders for making
recordings.
PREV
MUTE
b
D1 to D5 (Direct) buttons
MENU
TEST
EXIT
(3) SURR (surround) button
Used to select the surround mode.
Five types of direct operations can be performed
for each of the 12 source buttons such as the DVD,
television, amplifier, and other AV equipment. The
pages can be switched, so 4 pages × 5 types = 20
operations can be performed for a single source. The
text display can also be changed.
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
⁄
⁄
⁄
⁄
(4) 7.1CH button
Press this button to select the output of an external multi
channel decoder.
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7
8
THX
9
(5) ATT button
CLEAR
MEMO
0
⁄
⁄
When the input signal is too high and the voice
distorts even by throttling the SR7001 VOLUME
control, turn on this function. “ATT” is indicated when
this function is activated.
The input level is reduced. Attenuator is invalid for
use with the output signal of “REC OUT”.
n
> (Page) button
@
HDMI INPUT / OUTPUT
This button is used to switch pages for the Direct
button. The current page is shown on the LCD.
This unit has 4 HDMI inputs and 1 HDMI output. The
input function can be selected from the OSD menu
system. (See page 15) (The SR8001 has 2 HDMI
outputs.)
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
⁄
⁄
m
VOL (Volume) button
Note:
AUX1
This button is used to adjust the volume for the
amplifier and television.
• This function is unavailable during the digital input
is selected.
LIGHT
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
Note:
(6) SPK-AB button
Speaker mode is switched in the following
sequence.
• Set the AMP mode to use this button with the
SR7001.
A → B → A+B → off
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(7) DISP. button
Selects the display mode for the front display of the
SR7001.
⁄
MENU button
I
NAME indicator
LCD INDICATORS
This is displayed when the remote control is in
renaming mode.
(when AMP mode is selected)
This button is used to call up the SETUP MAIN
MENU of the SR7001.
Information about currently selected source and
direct code names are displayed on the LCD.
(8) OSD button
When this button is pressed, the current setting are
displayed on the TV monitor.
J
LEARN indicator
This is displayed when the remote control is in
learning mode.
⁄
PREV (Previous) button
A
(9) SLEEP (sleep timer) button
This button is used for setting the sleep timer. It can
be operated the same way as the button in unit.
This button is used to return to the previous channel
on the television or other device.
Note:
(0) THX button
• This button is unavailable for SR7001.
Use this button to select the THX mode.
LEARN
J
NAME
B
I
H
G
F
E
⁄
CH (Channel) button
⁄
MEMO button
MACRO
This is used to change channels.
This button is used to store settings to memory or
program a source.
¤
CURSOR buttons
USE
These buttons are used when controlling the cursor
of the SR7001, DVD, or other AV equipment.
PAGE
1
2
3
4
⁄
CONTROL button
C
D
Thses buttons are used when operating the PLAY,
STOP, PAUSE, and other commands of a source.
Note:
¤
LCD
A
Source Name indicator
• This button is unavailable for the SR7001.
Information about the sources and modes are shown
on the LCD.
This displays the name of the selected source, such
as DVD, television, or other AV equipment (up to five
characters).
⁄
SOURCE button
Thses buttons are used to switch the source of your
A/V Receiver / amplifer. Each time a source button is
pressed, the remote control changes to the source
which was pressed.
Thisremotecontrolcancontrol12typesofequipment.
To change the A/V Receiver / amplifier source, press
this button twice within two seconds. The signal is
sent when it is pressed the second time.
B
Direct Button Name indicator
This displays up to 20 types of button names for each
source. (up to six characters)
C
Page indicator
This displays the current page position.
Note:
• Select the AMP as the source to use this remote
controll with the SR7001.
D
Transmission indicator
This lights up when the remote control is sending a
signal.
• The MD button does not work with the SR7001.
⁄
LIGHT 1 and 2 buttons
E
USE indicator
Pressing these buttons will light up the LCD and its
buttons. This lighting time can be set. If the lighting
time is set to 0 seconds, the backlight turns on only
while this button is pressed. The operations for
LIGHT 1 and 2 are identical.
This is displayed under normal operation.
F
Battery Level indicator
This is displayed when the battery level is low.
⁄
CLEAR button
G
TIMER indicator
This button is used to erase the memory or program
of a source.
This is displayed when the macro timer is set.
H
MACRO indicator
This is displayed when the remote control is in macro
programming mode.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Close the cover until it clicks.
REMOTE CONTROL RANGE
BATTERY REPLACEMENT INTERVAL
SETTING THE TIME
3.
The distance between the transmitter of the remote
control and the IR SENSOR of the SR7001 should be
less than 5 meters. If the remote control is pointed in
a direction other than the IR SENSOR or if there is
an obstacle between them, use of the remote control
may not be possible.
Under normal usage, alkaline batteries last
approximately four months. When the batteries wear
out, a battery mark is displayed on the LCD. Although
the remote control can still be used when the battery
mark is displayed, the batteries should be replaced
as soon as possible. The LCD eventually starts to
flash when buttons are pressed, the remote control
will be unable to transmit signals or learn codes.
Example: Setting to 6:20PM (18:20)
1
2
POWER
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
SOURCE
1.
M
D1
D2
D3
D5
3.
Remote-controllable range
USE
USE
PAGE
1
PAGE
2
1
SR7001
2.
• This remote control uses non-volatile memory so
that the learned codes and macro programs are
retained even if the batteries are removed.
3
4
CH
VOL
CAUTIONS ON BATTERIES
AV
S
IN
PU
UR
RO
T
S
UN
D
ELEC
RE
• Use “AAA” type batteries in this remote control
unit.
CE
TO
IV
ER
R
S
R7
10
0
Reset the clock after replacing the batteries.
DIS
SL
STA
P
ND
M
UL
TI
BY
EE
P
PO
AU
T
O
6.
4.
5.
W
AU
ER
TO
ON
S
U
TU
NE
R
R
/O
D
LEARN
FF
D
I
R
E
C
ST
LEARN
T
SP
KR
DIS
A
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
C
6
B
.1
V
-O
FF
MT
X
6
PE
.
1
AK
NIG
A
T
T
PH
ON
ES
HT
A
NAL
PREV
MUTE
D
I
G
O
G
IT
A
L
SU
RR
OU
A
A
DIG
L
ND
C
ITA
P
C
L
M
C
LFE
S
R
L
SR
VO
LU
ME
• We recommend that you use alkali batteries.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
DO
WN
REA
DY
Approx. 5 m
Safety Precautions for Batteries
CH.SEL
SURR
UP
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
DI
GI
TA
L
S-
VID
AU
X
1
EO
IN
• If the remote control unit does not operate from
close to the main unit, replace the batteries with
new ones, even if less then a year has passed.
PU
VID
T
EO
L
AU
Be sure to always observe the following precautions
to prevent fluid leakage, overheating, fire, breakage,
accidental ingestion, and other accidents.
• If the batteries are left unused for a long period
of time, the battery fluid may leak or the batteries
may corrode.
DI
O
R
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
60°
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
0
5
6
OFF
PO
ON
/O
W
ER
FF
SO
UR
CE
O
N
M
• The included battery is only for verifying operation.
Replace it with a new battery as soon as
possible.
D
2
D
C
H
3
D
4
D
5
V
O
L
O
K
PR
EV
MENU
TE
ST
1
GU
IDE
7.1
CH
4
CH.S
MUTE
DIS
EL
P
2
7
AT
T
E
XIT
CLEA
5
SU
RR
OS
D
R
3
PK-A
S
8
B
6
0
SLEE
P
9
TV
M
EM
TU
NE
O
R
D
VD
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TA
PE
CD
VC
R
AU
X1
1
2
CD-
R
DS
S
LIG
HT
AU
X2
M
Lea
rnin
g
D
Rem
RC
1
400
ote
AM
P
Contr
olle
r
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
LEARN
AUX1
• When inserting the batteries, be careful to do so in
the proper direction, following the + and - marks in
the remote control unit’s battery compartment.
• Do not use the batteries in the remote control with
the plus and minus polarity reversed.
Remote control unit (RC8001SR)
LIGHT
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
•
Do not attempt to recharge, heat, or disassemble
the batteries. Do not put the batteries in a fire.
USE
PAGE
1
2
• To prevent damage or battery fluid leakage:
- Do not use a new battery with an old one.
- Do not use two different types of batteries.
- Do not short-circuit, disassemble, heat or
dispose of batteries in flames.
LOADING BATTERIES
• Do not use the remote control with old batteries or
worn-out batteries inserted.
When you bought this remote control and insert the
batteries to the remote control at first, the steps 1 to
3 are skipped.
The life of the batteries used with the remote control
is about 4 months with normal use. Also be sure to
replace batteries earlier when you notice that they are
getting weak.
• Do not use different types of batteries or mix old
and new batteries in the remote control.
Starts from step 4 to set the time.
• Remove the batteries when not planning to use
the remote control unit for a long period of time.
• If the remote control is not operating properly,
replace the batteries with new ones.
Remove the back cover.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
1.
• If the batteries should leak, carefully wipe off the
fluid from the inside of the battery compartment,
then insert new batteries.
more.
• If any of the batteries are leaking, completely wipe
up all leaked battery fluid, and then replace the
batteries with new ones.
The menu is displayed.
Press the > button once.
2.
• When disposing of used batteries, please comply
with governmental regulations or environmental
public instruction’s rules that apply in your country
or area.
This displays second page (SETUP).
Press the D4 (CLOCK) direct button.
3.
The “ ” indicator blinks and the clock indicator
displays “0:00”.
Press the 1 and 8 numeric button to set the
4.
hour indicator.
The hour indicator displays “18”.
Insert the new batteries (AAA type) with correct
2.
The minute indicator blinks “_”.
and
polarity.
Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the
5.
minute indicator.
The minute indicator displays “20”.
The hour indicator blinks.
Press the OK cursor button to start the clock.
6.
The clock starts from 0 second at the time that was
set and return to normal (USE) mode.
Whenever the batteries are replaced, the clock
shows 00:00. Please reset the clock. (The time
setting is not backed up.)
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the SR7001 on and off
CHECKING THE TIME
AMP MODE
POWER ON
POWER OFF
D1 - D5 / >(Page)
VOL +/-
Turns the SR7001 on
Turns the SR7001 off
(Refer to page vi)
To check the time, hold down the > button for three
seconds or more. The current time is displayed for
five seconds.
POWER
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
Adjust the over all sound level
Decreases the sound temporarily
Move the cursor for setting in SETUP MENU mode
Enter the SETUP MENU
Note:
SOURCE
MUTE
Cursor
OK
M
• Although the remote control uses a quartz clock,
the time may become out of sync over the course of
operation. Be sure to correct the clock from time to
time.
1
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Confirms the setting in SETUP MENU mode
Enter the SETUP MENU
Exits from SETUP MENU
USE
P
AGE
1
2
3
4
MENU
EXIT
CH
VOL
TEST (1)
CH.SEL (2)
Enter the test tone menu
GENERAL INFORMATION OF RC8001SR TO
SR7001
Call up SETUP MENU and adjusts speaker levels or 7.1ch
input setup
Selects the surround mode
SURR (3)
7.1CH (4)
ATT (5)
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
To control the SR7001 by your RC8001SR, you have
to select the device AMP or TUNER by pressing the
function selector button. Please refer below for the
details in AMP and TUNER mode.
PREV
MUTE
Selects the 7.1CH IN
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
Reduces the input level
4
5
OSD
6
SPK-AB (6)
DISP (7)
OSD (8)
Selects the speaker system
Changes the front display mode
Displays the current setting on the monitor
Sets the sleep timer function
Selects the THX mode
DISP
SLEEP
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
0
SLEEP (9)
THX (0)
Function selector
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
AMP
TUNER
TAPE
Selects a particular source component
AUX1
LIGHT
GUIDE / LIP.SYNC Selects the LIP.SYNC mode
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
TUNER MODE
D1 - D5 / >(Page)
CH +/-
GUIDE
(Refer to page vi)
Selects a preset station up and down
Selects the “Frequency direct input”
Input the numeric
POWER
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
SOURCE
M
0–9
MEMO
1
D1
Enter the tuner preset memory numbers
Clears the inputting
Selects a frequency band
CLEAR
TUNER
USE
P
AGE
1
CH
VOL
OK
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
0
TV
DVD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
AUX1
LIGHT
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Surround left and right speakers
When the SR7001 is used in surround operation,
the preferred location for surround speakers is on
the side walls of the room, at or slightly behind the
listening position.
CONNECTING SPEAKERS
CONNECTIONS
SPEAKER PLACEMENT
Surround
BACK
Powered
subwoofer
FRONT A
Left
Passive
subwoofer
Power
The center of the speaker should face into the
room.
The ideal surround speaker system for this unit is 7-
speaker systems, using front left and right speakers,
a center speaker, surround left and right speakers,
a surround back left and right speakers, and a
subwoofer.
Right
Left
Right
Amplifier
INVERT
OUTPUT
INPUT
INPUT
LEVEL
BTL
EXT. CONT. IN
REMOTE CONT.
MASTER SLAVE
MIN
MAX
VIDEO/
SYSTEM OUT
OUT
IN
+5~13V DC
Surround back left and right speakers
Surround back speakers are required when a full 7.1-
channel system is installed.
FRONT B
Left
SPEAKER SYSTEM
MINIMUM OHMS
4
Right
For best results we recommend that all front speakers
be of the same type, with identical or similar driver
units. This will deliver smooth pans across the front
sound stage as the action moves from side to side.
Your center channel speaker is very important as
over 80 % of the dialog from a typical motion picture
emanates from the center channel.
It should possess similar sonic characteristics to the
main speakers. Surround channel speakers need not
be identical to the front channel speakers, but they
should be of high quality.
The surround center speaker is useful for playback
of Dolby Digital Surround EX or DTS-ES. One of
the benefits of both Dolby Digital and DTS is that
surround channels are discrete full range, while they
were frequency limited in earlier “Pro Logic” type
systems.
Bass effects are an important part of home theater.
For optimal enjoyment a subwoofer should be used
as it is optimized for low frequency reproduction. If
you have full range front speakers, however, they
may be used in place of a subwoofer with proper
setting of the switches in the menu system.
Speakers should be placed on a rear wall, behind the
listening position.
The center of the speaker should face into the
room.
(
)
(
)
INPUT
1
TV
INPUT
2
DVD
SURROUND
BACK
SPEAKER
SYSTEMS
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
L
R
L
RS-232C
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM
ANTENNA
FRONT
A
OUT
PUT
2
CB
/
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
/
Y
INPUT
DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT
/
/
P
Y
/
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
P
R
PB
R
PR
(
)
(
)
INPUT
3
VCR1
4
DSS/VCR2
( )
1 TV
(
)
(
)
VCR1 INPUT
(
4
)
INPUT
INPUT
2
DVD
INPUT
3
1
OUTPUT
2
Subwoofer
HDMI
Ver1.2
XM
AC IN
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
We recommend using a sub-woofer to have maximum
bass effect. Sub-woofer bears only low frequency range
so you can place it any where in the room.
FRONT
B
R
R
IN
IR
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEAKER
1
CEN
TER
OFF
5
6
COAX.
IN
FLASHER RECEIVER
IN
PRE
OUT
IN
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
2
2
1
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
OUT
TAPE
L
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
MULTI OUT
SURR.
L
HEIGHT OF THE SPEAKER UNITS
R
7.1CH
IN
R
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
FRONT A OOR B.CEENTER..SURR.
SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS
FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
Front left and right speakers, and a center speaker
Align the tweeters and mid-range drivers on the
three front speakers at the same height, as best as
possible.
Surround left and right speakers, and surround
back speaker
Place the surround left, right and surround back
speakers higher than your ears by about 70cm–1m.
Also place the speakers at the same height, as best
as possible.
Right
Surround
Left
Center
Subwoofer
Surround Left
CONNECTING SPEAKER WIRE
1.
2.
Front Left
70cm
1m
Surround Back
Left
Strip away approx. 3/8 inch (10 mm) of wire
insulation.
1.
2.
3/8 inch
(10 mm)
Twist the bared wire ends tight, to prevent short
circuits.
Front Center
3.
4.
5.
0°
Surround Back
Right
Loosen the knob by turning it counterclockwise.
3.
4.
22°
150°
Insert the bare part of the wire into the hole in
side of each terminal.
30°
135°
110°
Surround Right
Front Right
Tighten the knob by turning it clockwise to
secure the wire.
90°
5.
Front left and right speakers
We recommend to set the front L and R speakers
with 45-60 degrees from the listening position.
Note:
• Use magnetically-shielded speakers for front left,
right and the center speakers when the speakers are
installed near the TV and the TV is a monitor type.
Center speaker
Align the front line of the center speaker with the front
L/R speakers. Or place the center speaker a little
backward from the line.
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Caution:
CONNECTING AUDIO COMPONENTS
•
Be sure to use speakers with the specified impedance as
shown on the rear panel of this unit.
Tape Deck
CD recorder / MD deck
•
To prevent damage to circuitry, do not let the bare
speaker wires touch each other and do not let them
touch any metal part
OUT IN
L
L
R
R
of this unit.
• Do not touch the
speaker terminals
when the power is
on. It may cause
you to receive an
electric shocks.
OUT IN
DIGITAL DIGITAL
L
R
L
L
R
R
L
L
INPUT
OUTPUT
R
R
Analog Audio
L
R
R
L
L
R
• Do not connect more than one speaker cable to one
speaker terminal. Doing so may damage this unit.
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
2
)
DVD
INPUT
OUT
PUT
1
Digital Audio (coaxial)
Digital Audio (optical)
Note:
Be sure to connect the positive and negative cables for
RS-232
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM ANTENNA
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
/
/
P
Y
/
/
Y
/
PB
•
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PB
R
PB
PR
PR
INPUT 3(VCR1)
INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2)
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
(
3
)
VCR1 INPUT
(
4
)
DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
INPUT
the speaker properly. If they are miss-connected, the
signal phase will be reversed and the signal quality will
be corrupted.
HDMI
Ver1.2
XM
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
1
2
5
6
COAX.
IN
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
PRE
OUT
IN
IN
CONNECTING A SUBWOOFER
2
1
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
Use the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack to connect a
powered subwoofer (power amplifier built in ).
If your subwoofer is a passive type (power amplifier
is not built in), connect a monaural power amplifier to
the PRE OUT SUBWOOFER jack and connect the
subwoofer to the amplifier.
L
7.1CH
IN
R
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
R
L
R
L
The output audio signal from the TAPE OUT jack and
the CD/CD RECORDER OUT jack is the same signal
which is currently selected.
Notes:
• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an
CONNECTING DIGITAL AUDIO COMPONENTS
• There are 6 digital inputs, 3 coaxial jacks and
3 optical jacks, on the rear panel. You can use
these jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS
bitstream signals from a CD, DVD, or other digital
source components.
external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder
when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack
of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.
Caution:
• Do not connect this unit and other components
to mains power until all connections between
components have been completed.
• The digital signal jacks on the SR7001 conform
to the EIA standard. If you use a cable that does
not conform to this standard, the SR7001 may not
function properly.
• There is one digital output coaxial jack and one
optical output jack on the rear panel. These jacks
can be connected to a CD recorder-, or a MD deck
inputs, respectively.
Notes:
• Insert all plugs and connectors securely. Incomplete
connections may make noise.
• Each type of audio jack works independently.
Signals input through the digital and analog jacks are
output through the corresponding digital and analog
jacks, respectively.
• Refer to the instructions for each component. To
setup the digital audio format of DVD player, or
other digital source’s connected to digital input
jacks.
• Be sure to connect the left and right channels
properly.
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and
white connectors are for the L (left) channel.
• Use fiber optical cables (optical) for DIG-1,2,3
input jacks. Use 75 ohms coaxial cables (for
digital audio or video) for DIG-4, 5, 6 input jacks.
• Be sure to connect input and output properly.
• Refer to the instructions for each component that is
connected to this unit.
• You can designate the input for each digital input/
output jacks according to your component. See
page 25.
• Do not bind audio/video connection cables with
power cords and speaker cables this will result in
generating a hum or other noise.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD player
VIDEO PROJECTOR
HDMI INPUT
• When multiple components are connected to this
receiver, turn power to unused components off to
prevent interference between them.
HDMI JACK
This SR7001 has four HDMI inputs and one HDMI
output (The SR8001 has two HDMI outputs.). It can
send digital video and audio signals from DVDs and
other sources directly to a display. It minimizes signal
degradation caused by analog conversion so that high
quality images can be enjoyed.
The SR7001 is also capable of converting analog
videosignals(CompositeVideo,S-Video,Component
Video) for HDMI output.
• Disconnecting or connecting cables with the power
on can damage the equipment. Turn the power off
before disconnecting or connecting cables.
HDMI OUTPUT
• Some DVD-Audio disks disable downmixing.
These types of disks are not played back correctly
unless the left, center, right and surround left and
right speakers, and subwoofer are connected.
• If a DVD player that does not support HDMI 1.1
is connected to the SR7001, multi channel PCM
playback is not possible even with DVD-Audio
disks.
Select an input source from the OSD menu system.
(See page 25, 36)
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
SURROUND
BACK
SPEAKER
SYSTEMS
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
L
R
L
RS-232C
• If an Super Audio CD player that does not support
HDMI 1.2 is connected to the receiver, DSD
playback is not possible even with Super Audio
CD.
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM ANTENNA
FRONT
A
Notes:
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
/
P
/
P
Y
/
PB
/
PR
Y
/
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO
B
R
PR
INPUT 3(VCR1) INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2)
INPUT 3 VCR1 INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
• When the HDMI output is connected to a display
monitor that does not support HDCP, signals are not
output. To view images in HDMI, it is necessary to
connect to a display that supports HDCP.
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
(
)
(
)
HHDMI
Ver1.2
XM
AC IN
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
FRONT
B
(*DSD: Direct Stream Digital)
R
R
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
• If a DVD player or other device with DVI output
is connected to the SR7001, a separate audio
cable (optical-digital, coaxial digital or analog) is
needed for the audio signals. In this case, select the
connected audio input as explained in “1-1 FUNC
INPUT SETUP”. (See page 25)
• Multi channel PCM signals and audio signals of 62
kHz or higher that are input from the HDMI jack are
not output from the DIGITAL OUT jacks.
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEAKER
• There may be no image output if connected to a
TV or display that is not compatible with the above
format.
1
2
CEN
TER
OFF
5
6
COAX.
IN
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
PRE
OUT
IN
IN
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
2
1
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
L
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
SURR.
• RefertotheinstructionmanualoftheTVordisplayto
be connected to the SR7001 for detailed information
regarding the HDMI terminal.
L
R
7.1CH
IN
R
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.
SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS
FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
* HDCP: High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection
SATELLITE TUNER
HDMI OUTPUT
• Depending on the quiality of the cable used, the
HDMI signal may be affected by noise.
CONNECTING HDMI DEVICES
An HDMI cable (sold separately) is used to connect the
HDMI jack on the SR7001 with the HDMI jack on a DVD
player, TV, projector or other component. To transmit
multichannel audio via HDMI, the connected player
must support multichannel audio transmission through
its HDMI jack.
HDMI video streaming is compatible with DVI in
principle. Therefore, it is possible to connect to a TV
or monitor that has a DVI terminal using an HDMI-DVI
conversion cable or plug. When connecting to a DVI
terminal, connect the audio signal separately.
Notes:
• Some HDMI components can be controlled over the
HDMI cable, but this receiver cannot control other
components this way.
• When connected to a monitor (i.e., TV, projector,
etc.) that does not support HDCP, video and audio
are not output.
• DVI cables come with 24-pin and 29-pin plugs. This
receiver supports 24-pin DVI-D cables; 29-pin DVI
cables cannot connect to it.
• Some source devices such as DVD players or set
top box do not support HDMI repeater operations
like those of the SR7001. In such case, pictures are
not properly projected on monitors such as TVs and
projectors.
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT JACKS
CONNECTING VIDEO COMPONENTS
There are 3 types of video jacks on the rear panel.
VIDEO
PROJECTOR
VIDEO jack
Satellite Tuner
DVD player
COMPONENT
VIDEO IN
The video signal for the VIDEO jacks is the
conventional composite video signal.
S-VIDEO
IN
COMPONENT
VIDEO OUT
DIGITAL AUDIO
OUT OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
Y
CB
/PB
CR
/PR
Y
CB
/PB
CR
/PR
L
R
S-VIDEO jack
DIGITAL
OUT
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO
OUT
S-VIDEO
OUT
The video signal is separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) signals for the S-VIDEO jack. The S-VIDEO
signals enables high-quality color reproduction. If
your video component has an S-VIDEO output, we
recommend to use it. Connect the S-VIDEO output
jack on your video component to the S-VIDEO input
jack on the SR7001.
L
R
L
R
L
R
(
)
(
)
DVD
INPUT
1
TV
INPUT
2
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
RS-232C
( )
ANTENNA
FM 75Ω GND AM
OUT
PUT
2
CB
/
C
R
CB
/
C
R
C
B
/
P
C
R
Y
/
Y
INPUT
DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT
/
PR
Y
/
PR
COMPONENT
VIDEO
P
B
P
R
PB
B
INPUT 3(VCR1)
(
4
)
DSS/VCR2
Component jack
(
1
)
TV
(
)
(
)
VCR1 INPUT
(
4
)
INPUT
INPUT
2
DVD
INPUT
3
1
OUTPUT
2
HDMI
Ver1.2
Make component video connections to a TV or
monitor with component inputs to produce higher
quality video images. Use a component video cable
or 3 video cords to connect the component video out
jacks on the SR7001 to the monitor.
XM
AC IN
TV(1) DVD2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
R
L
R
IN
IR
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
MULTI SPEAKER
/SPEAKER
SUB SPEAKER
O
C
1
O
4
1
5
6
COAX.
IN
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
FLASHER RECEIVER
IN
PRE
OUT
IN
OUT
PUT
1
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
2
2
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
OUT
TAPE
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
MULTI OUT
RS-232C
L
FM (75Ω) GND AM ANTENNA
7.1CH
IN
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
/
CR
/
CB
CR
/
CB
/
CR
/
Y
Y
/
Y
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PB
PR
PB
PR
PB
PR
R
INPUT 3(VCR1)
INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2)
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
( ) ( )
INPUT 3 VCR1 INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
IN
OT
IN
OT
IN
O
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUDIO
AUX2
Notes:
HDMI
Ver1.2
XM
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
•
Be sure to connect the left and right audio channels
properly.
L
R
L
R
R
L
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
Red connectors are for the R (right) channel, and
white connectors are the for L (left) channel.
1
2
5
6
COAX.
IN
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
IN
PRE
OUT
IN
2
1
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
• Be sure to connect the inputs and outputs of the
video signals properly.
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
L
7.1CH
IN
L
R
L
R
•
If you connect the S-VIDEO or component signal to
the S-VIDEO or component jack on the SR7001, it is
not necessary to connect the conventional video signal
to the VIDEO (composite) jack. If you use both video
inputs, the SR7001 gives priority to the S-VIDEO
signal.
R
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
AUDIO AUDIO
OUT IN
VIDEO
S-VIDEO
OUT IN
OUT IN
L
R
L
R
R
L
Video
VCR
• Each type of video jack works independently.
Signals input to the VIDEO (composite) and S-
VIDEO jacks or component are output to the
corresponding VIDEO (composite) and S-VIDEO
or component jacks, respectively.
S-Video
L
R
Analog Audio
•
The SR7001 has the “TV-AUTO ON/OFF” function
to turn the TV ON or OFF automatically, by sensing
the incoming video signal from the VIDEO jacks.
AUDIO
OUT
VIDEO VIDEO
S-VIDEO
IN
Digital Audio
(coaxial)
OUT
IN
• You may need to setup the digital audio output
format of your DVD player, or other digital source
components. Refer to the instructions of the each
component connected to the digital input jacks.
L
R
Digital Audio
(optical)
• There is no Dolby Digital RF input jack. Use an
external RF demodulator Dolby Digital decoder
when connecting the Dolby Digital RF output jack
of the videodisc player to the digital input jack.
TV
• The COMPONENT OUTPUT 1 and 2 terminals
of the SR7001 can output the same video signal.
Moreover, the OUTPUT 2 terminal of the SR8001
can output video signals for multi room playback.
(See page 35)
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ADVANCED CONNECTING
CONNECTING THE REMOTE CONTROL JACKS
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
OU
PU
1
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM ANTENNA
OU
PU
2
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
CB
CR
/
R
L
R
L
R
L
Y
/
/
Y
/
PB
/
P
Y
/
PB
COMPONENT
VIDEO
PB
PR
R
PR
(
INPUT 3 VCR1
)
(
INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2
)
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
( ) ( )
INPUT 3 VCR1 INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
HDMI
Ver1.2
(
UT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO
R
L
R
L
R
L
DVD Audio player
or
Super Audio CD
Multi channel player
2
RS-232C
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VID
SBL
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
/
PB
/
Y
/
/
P
Y
/
PB
1
2
PR
PB
R
PR
5
6
COAX.
IN
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
(
UT 3 VCR1
)
(
INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2
)
( )
T 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1
OUTPUT 2
IN
IN
RC OUT
CENTER
2
HDMI
Ver1.2
1
2
3
OPT.
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
XM
L
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
S
AC
OPTION
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
L
R
FRONT SURR. SURR.
BACK
SUB
IN
IR
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
R
DC OUT
SBL
WOOFER
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
S
1
1
2
N
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
FLASHER RECEIVER
IN IN
PRE
OUT
CENTER
Power
Amplifer
2
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
L
UT
E
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
CD/CDR
R
L
1
7.1CH
IN
Subwoofer
SURR.
BACK
SUB
FRONT SURR.
R
WOOFER
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
(
)
AUX2
O
DVD player
CD player
REMOTE
REMOTE
REMOTE
CD recorder
CONTROL
CONTROL
CONTROL
R
L
R
L
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
IN
IN
IN
Front
Right
Front
Left
OUT
OUT
OUT
Center
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
EXTERNAL INTERNAL
Surround
Left
Surround
Right
Surround
Back Left
Surround
Back Right
q
w
You can control other Marantz products through the
SR7001 with the remote control by connecting the
REMOTE CONTROL terminals on each unit.
Whenever external infrared sensors or similar devices
are connected to RC-5 IN of the SR7001, be sure to
always disable operation of the infrared sensor on the
main unit by using the following procedure.
CONNECTING MULTI CHANNEL AUDIO SOURCE
CONNECTING AN EXTERNAL POWER AMPLIFIER
The 7.1CH INPUT jacks are for multichannel audio
source such as a Super Audio CD multichannel
player, DVD audio player or external decoder.
If you use these jacks, switch on the 7.1CH INPUT
and set the 7.1CH INPUT level by using the SETUP
MAIN MENU. See page25.
The PREOUT jacks are for connecting external
power amplifiers.
Be sure to connect each speaker to the corresponding
external power amplifier.
The signal transmitted from the remote control is
received by the remote sensor on the SR7001. Then
the signal is sent to the connected device through
this terminal. Therefore you need to aim the remote
control only at the SR7001. Also, if a Marantz power
amplifier (some models excluded) is connected to
one of these terminals, the power amplifier’s, power
switch is synchronized with this unit’s power switch.
Hold down the MULTI button and the MENU
button on the front panel at the same time for
five seconds.
1.
The setting “IR=ENABLE” is shown on the FL
DISPLAY.
2.
Press the CURSOR buttons (1, 2) to change
this to “IR=DISABLE”.
3.
Set the REMOTE CONTROL SWITCH on the other
units, (not the SR7001) to “EXT.” (external) to use
this feature.
Press the ENTER button. Once this setting is
made, the infrared sensor on the main unit is
disabled.
4.
Note:
• Be sure to set to “IR=ENABLE” when external
infrared sensors or similar devices are not connected.
Otherwise, the main unit will be unable to receive
remote control commands.
To restore the original setting, perform steps 1
to 4 to set to “IR=ENABLE”.
5.
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING THE SUPPLIED ANTENNAS
CONNECTING THE ANTENNA TERMINALS
Connecting the supplied FM antenna
The supplied FM antenna is for indoor use only.
During use, extend the antenna and move it in various
directions until the clearest signal is received.
Fix it with push pins or similar implements in
the position that will cause the least amount of
distortion.
AM Loop
Antenna
AM External
Antenna
FM Antenna
FM External
Antenna
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor
antenna may improve the quality.
Connecting the supplied AM loop antenna
The supplied AM loop antenna is for indoor use
only.
Set it in the direction and position it to where you
receive the clearest sound. Put it as far away as
possible from the unit, televisions, speaker cables,
and power cords.
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
SURROUND
BACK
SPEAKER
SYSTEMS
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
L
RS-232C
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM
FRONT
A
ANNTENNA
OUT
PUT
2
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
/
P
Y
/
COMPONENT
VIDEO
R
PB
PR
R
L
I
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DV
( )
UT 3 VCR1 2
HDMI
Ver1.2
XM
AC IN
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
FRONT
B
R
R
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OU
RC-
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
SBL
If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor
antenna may improve the quality.
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEAKER
CEN
TER
OFF
5
6
COAX.
PRE
OUT
5Ω GND AM
)
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
ANT
1
2
3
OPT.
R
UT
OUT
L
Press and hold down the lever of the AM antenna
terminal.
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
1.
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
TAPE
SURR.
L
R
7.1CH
IN
R
Insert the bare wire into the antenna terminal.
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.
SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS
FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS
2.
3.
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
Release the lever.
Note:
• Connect the shielded grounding wire (black) to the
AM antenna GND terminal.
ASSEMBLING THE AM LOOP ANTENNA
Release the vinyl tie and take out the connection
line.
Place the antenna on stable surface.
CONNECTING AN FM OUTDOOR ANTENNA
1.
4.
Notes:
• Keep the antenna away from noise sources (neon
signs, busy roads, etc.).
• Do not put the antenna close to power lines. Keep it
well away from power lines, transformers, etc.
• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,
grounding is necessary.
Bend the base part in the reverse direction.
2.
3.
CONNECTING AN AM OUTDOOR ANTENNA
An outdoor antenna will be more effective if it is
stretched horizontally above a window or outside.
Notes:
• Do not remove the AM loop antenna.
Insert the hook at the bottom of the loop part
into the slot at the base part.
• To avoid the risk of lightning and electrical shock,
grounding is necessary.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
XM RADIO OVERVIEW
CONNECTING THE XM CONNECT-AND-PLAY ANTENNA
SR7001 is the XM Ready® receiver. You can receive XM Satellite Radio® by connecting to the XM Connect-
and-PlayTM or Passport system (sold separately) and subscribing the XM service.
• Plug the XM Connect-and-Play antenna or Passport system into XM terminal on the rear panel.
• Position the XM antenna near a south-facing window to receive the best signal.
When making connections, also refer to the operating instructions of the XM Connect-and-Play antenna or
Passport system.
Introducing XM Satellite Radio
There’s a world of audio listening pleasure beyond AM and FM. XM Satellite Radio which includes:
• Over 170 Digital Channels
XM
• The most commercial-free music in satellite radio
• Live concerts plus exclusive original programming
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
)
INPUT
2
DVD
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR800
L
• The biggest names in news, talk, and entertainment
• The most sports play-by-play
RS-232C
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
/
/
Y
INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2
DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
/
/
Y
/
PB
P
B
P
R
PB
P
R
PR
(
)
(
)
INPUT 3 VCR1
(
4
)
NPUT
HDMI
Ver1.2
• Major league Baseball. Every team. All season long.
XM
AC IN
OR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
T
R
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
RC
IN
DC OUT
1
SBL
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEAKER
1
2
OFF
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
PRE
OUT
IN
IN
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
How to Subscribe
2
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
(800) 967-2346. Customers should have their Radio ID and credit card ready. The Radio ID can be found by
selecting channel 0 on the radio.
CD/CDR
7.1CH
IN
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
OUT
AUDIO
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUX2
(See the “CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH AND RADIO ID”)
Note
• Keep the power supply cord unplugged until the XM Connect-and-Play antenna connection have been completed.
A Warning Against Reverse Engineering
It is prohibited to copy, decompile, disassemble, reverse engineer, or manipulate any technology incorporated
in receivers compatible with the XM Satellite Radio system.
Furthermore, the AMBE® voice compression software included in this product is protected by intellectual
property rights including patent rights, copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. The user of
this or any other software contained in an XM Radio is explicitly prohibited from attempting to copy, decompile,
reverse engineer, or disassemble the object code, or in any other way convert the object code into human-
readable form. The software is licensed solely for use within this product.
XM $ 12.95 monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Connect-and-Play and Passport system
required to receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a
one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to
change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an XL. Channle blocking is available
for XM radio receivers by calling 1-800-XMRADIO. Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement
available at xmradio.com. XM service only available in the 48 contiguous United States. [XM Ready,
XMDirect*] are trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING FOR SPEAKER C USE
CONNECTING FOR THE MULTI ROOM
Bi-wire Connection
A bi-wire connection is possible with speakers that
have two sets of inputs (for treble and bass).
This allows you to drive the treble and bass units
with separate channel amps, which enables better
sound quality. Connect the speakers as shown in the
figure. Set the SPEAKER C selector switch on the
rear panel to ON.
(Multi room speaker)
RIGHT
SPEAKER
LEFT
SPEAKER
Notes:
• If incorrectly connected, a protective circuit in the
receiver will trip and set the receiver to standby.
(The STANDBY indicator will flash.) In such case,
recheck the connections between the speakers and
the receiver.
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
SURROUND
BACK
SPEAKER
SYSTEMS
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
L
R
L
RS-232C
( )
FM 75Ω GND AM ANTENNA
FRONT
A
• Turn power to the receiver off before changing the
setting of the SPEAKER C selector switch.
OUT
PUT
2
CB
/
P
CR
/
P
CB
C
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
Y
/
/
PR
Y
/
COMPONENT
VIDEO
B
R
PB
PB
PR
INPUT 3(VCR1)
INPUT 4(DSS/VCR2)
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
( ) ( )
INPUT 3 VCR1 INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
HDMI
Ver1.2
• If the speaker is fitted with a shorting bar, remove the
shorting bar.
XM
AC IN
TV(1) DVD(2)
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4) MONITOR MULTI TV(1) DVD(2)
OUT OUT
VCR1(3)
DSS/VCR2(4)
MONI. OUT
FRONT
B
R
R
IN
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
VIDEO
4
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
DC OUT
1
SBL
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEEAKER
1
2
CEN
TER
OFF
5
6
COAX.
IN
IR
FLASHER RECEIVER
PRE
OUT
IN
IN
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
SURROUND
BBAACCKK
SPEAKER
SYSTEMS
2
1
2
3
OPT.
SYSTEMS
ODEL NO. SR8001
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
L
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
TV
DVD
VCR1
DSS/VCR2
CD/CDR
L
L
R
L
SURR.
L
FRONT
A
R
7.1CH
IN
R
L
R
HED
W MAX
FRONT A OR B.CENTER.SURR.
SURR BACK : MINIMUM 6 OHMS
FRONT A + B : MINIMUM 8 OHMS
EAKER ON
KER C
AKER
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
MULTIROOM MULTIROOM
LETS
0Hz
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
OFF
LEFT
RIGHT
AC IN
SPEAKER
SPEAKER
FRONT
B
R
R
L
R
R
L
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
OFF
SUB SPEEAKER
CEN
TER
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
L
SURR.
R
L
R
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
.CENTER.SURR.
INIMUM 6 OHMS
NIMUM 8 OHMS
AC OUTLET
120V 60Hz
L
MULTIROOM B
EAKER ON
KER C
R
RC IN FRONT
OFF
AKER
MAIN AMP
(For multiroom)
IR RECEIVER
R
L
RC OUT
VIDEO
IN
RIGHT
SPEAKER
LEFT
SPEAKER
L
R
FRONT
MONITOR
Note:
• You can use surround back speaker terminals as
MULTI SPK. terminals or SPEAKER C terminal
when you are not using surround back speakers.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONNECTING OTHER EQUIPMENT
a
(
INPUT 1 TV
)
(
INPUT 2 DVD
)
SURROUND
BACK
OUT
PUT
1
MODEL NO. SR8001
L
R
L
RS-232C
OUT
PUT
2
C
B
C
R
C
B
C
R
C
B
CR
/
Y
/
PB
/
Y
/
PB
/
P
Y
/
PB
MPONENT
VIDEO
PR
R
PR
(
INPUT 3 VCR1
)
(
INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2
)
( ) ( )
INPUT 3 VCR1 INPUT 4 DSS/VCR2 OUTPUT 1 OUTPUT 2
HDMI
Ver1.2
XM
AC IN
(
S/VCR2 4
)
)
( )
DVD 2
(
VCR1 3
)
(
DSS/VCR2 4
)
MONITOR MULTI TV 1
(
OUT OUT
MONI. OUT
R
IN
IR
OUT
IN
L
OUT
SL
S-VIDEO
C
OUT
RC-5 MULTI RC
DC OUT
1
SBL
MULTI SPEAKER ON
/SPEAKER C
SUB SPEAKER
1
2
OFF
AX.
IN
FLASHER RECEIVER
IN
PRE
OUT
IN
UNSWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
2
T.
EMITTER
OUT
MULTI OUT
OUT
TAPE
R
L
SR
SL
SBR
SBL
SW
C
SS/VCR2
CD/CDR
7.1CH
IN
SWITCHED
1.25A 150W MAX
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
OUT
A
B
R
SR
SBR
SW
AC OUTLETS
120V 60Hz
(
)
AUX2
AUDIO
sfgd
a RS232C
g IR RECEIVER IN (SR8001 Only)
Connect an external control device or other device for
servicing. (Use a straight cable for the connection.)
This receiver can be operated by remote control
without using the internal IR receiver, by connecting
an external IR receiver.
s DC OUT (DC TRIGGER)
GND
+12V
External devices can be controlled from the SR7001
by connecting them to the DC OUT terminal (12 V).
Signal
d EMITTER OUT (SR8001 Only)
Outputs the remote control signal input to the IR
RECEIVER IN terminals. External components can
be controlled by connecting them to the EMITTER
OUT terminal.
An IR receiver is connected as shown above.
Caution:
• Wrongly connecting an IR receiver or connecting
an IR receiver of the wrong voltage can damage the
SR7001, therefore do not do this.
f FLASHER IN
This receiver can be controlled by connecting a
control box or other control device to this receiver.
• 50mAofcurrentaresuppliedtothedeviceconnected
to the IR RECEIVER IN terminal.
• Connecting a device that requires more than 50 mA
of current to this receiver will damage this receiver.
Before using other devices, carefully check the
specifications of those devices.
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RC8001SR BUTTON CONTROL
SETUP
UP button
After all components are connected, initial setup
must be performed.
CH
VOL
ONSCREEN DISPLAY MENU SYSTEM
TheSR7001incorporatesanonscreenmenusystem,
which makes various operations possible by using
the cursor (3, 4, 1 , 2) and OK/ENTER buttons on
the remote control unit or on the front panel.
RIGHT button
DOWN button
OK
LEFT button
OK button
Note:
LIP·SYNC
•
To view the onscreen displays, make certain you
have connected the MONITOR OUT jack on the rear
panel to the composite, S-Video, component video
or HDMI input of your TV or projector. (See page
15, 16)
PREV
MUTE
GUIDE
MENU
EXIT
TEST
CH.SEL
SURR
Press the AMP button on the remote control
unit. (This step is not needed when operating
the setup menus from the SR7001.)
1.
2.
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
MENU button
Press this button to display
the OSD menu system.
EXIT button
Press this button to exit the OSD
menu system.
Press the MENU button on the remote control
or press the MENU button on the front panel.
The “MAIN MENU” of the OSD menu system
is displayed.
There are 6 items in the MAIN MENU.
SR7001 FRONT BUTTON CONTROL
Select the desired sub-menu with the 3 or
4 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER
button. The display will change to the selected
sub-menu.
3.
UP button
ENTER button
AMP (Amplifier) button
MULTI
SPEAKER
Notes:
• If you desire to adjust any sub-menu, you need to set
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
it to UNLOCKED.
AUX1
AMP
THX
MultEQ
MIC
• To lock sub-menus, set items 1-6 on the MAIN
MENU to “LOCKED”.
ENTER
LIGHT
LEFT button
RIGHT button
MENU
EXIT
1
2
<LOCKING SUBMENUS>
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
(1) Move the cursor to “1. INPUT SETUP” in the
MAIN MENU.
(2) Select the “0” mark left of “LOCKED” with the 1
or 2cursor buttons.
EXIT button
MENU button
Press this button to display the
OSD menu system.
Press this button to exit the
OSD menu system.
To exit from OSD menu system, press the
EXITbutton, or move the cursor to EXIT and
4.
DOWN button
press the OK/ENTER button.
Note:
• Settings are entered with the ENTER button on the
unit or the OK button on the remote control unit.
When using the remote control unit, use the OK
button as if it were the ENTER button.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
• After you complete this portion of the setup, move
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
MAIN MENU
MAIN MENU
1.INPUT SETUP
2.SPKR
3.SURR
4.VIDEO SETUP
5.PREFERENCE
6.ACOUSTIC EQ
SETUP
SETUP
LOCKED
UNLOCK
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
SUB MENU
1.INPUT SETUP
FUNC INPUT SETUP
7.1CH INPUT SETUP
FUNCTION RENAME
3.SURR SETUP
CHANNEL LEVEL
5.PREFERENCE
MULTI ROOM SETUP A B
DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2
PL x
CS
MUSIC PARAMETER
PARAMETER
NEO:6 PARAMETER
STANDBY
: NORMAL
BILINGUAL : MAIN+SUB
HDMI AUDIO: THROUGH
RE-EQ
: OFF
LFE LEVEL
: -10dB
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
“1. INPUT SETUP” (P. 24)
“3. SURROUND SETUP” (P. 33)
“5. PREFERENCE” (P. 36)
Note:
• TheSR7001doesnothave“MULTIROOM
SETUP” A and B selection options.
2.SPKR SETUP
4.VIDEO SETUP
VIDEO CONVERT
6.ACOUSTIC EQ.
AUTO SETUP
EQ.MODE
: OFF
MANUAL SETUP
.
TV AUTO
:DISABLE
:ENABLE
:DISABLE
:OUTPUT1
:MAIN
PRESET G.EQ ADJ
CHECK AUTO
THX AUDIO SETUP
OSD
INFO
I/P CONVERT
HDMI OUT
COMPO OUT2
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
“2. SPEAKER SETUP” (P. 27)
“4. VIDEO SETUP” (P. 35)
Note:
“6. ACOUSTIC EQ” (P. 38)
• The SR7001 does not have the “HDMI OUT”
and “COMPO OUT 2” sub-menus.
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1.INPUT SETUP
FUNC INPUT SETUP
7.1CH INPUT SETUP
FUNCTION RENAME
1 INPUT SETUP
This menu is for setting the matching the output of
connected audio devices and the input jacks of this
receiver.
•
•
•
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
FUNC INPUT SETUP :
“1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP” (see page 25)
P. 25
P. 25
P. 26
☞
☞
☞
7.1 CH INPUT SETUP :
“1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” (see page 25)
FUNC INPUT SETUP 1
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S
7.1CH INPUT SETUP
FUNCTION RENAME
VIDEO-IN
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR. L
SUB W
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LAST
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
FUNCTION: TV
RENAME
TV
:AUTO
1
2
3
4
F
1
2
3
4
-
1
2
3
4
-
1
2
3
4
: _T_V________
FUNC RENAME :
“1-3 FUNCTION RENAME” (see page 26)
DVD :AUTO
VCR1:AUTO
DSS :AUTO
AUX1:AUTO
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr
stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$
.
*
%&’() +, ./:;<=>?
Select “1. INPUT SETUP” from the MAIN
MENU with 3or 4cursor button, and press the
_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT
1.
RETURN
NEXTT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
OK/ENTER button.
1.INPUT SETUP
FUNC INPUT SETUP
7.1CH INPUT SETUP
FUNCTION RENAME
FUNC INPUT SETUP 2
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S
TAPE:ANA
CD/R:AUTO
AUX2:ANA
-
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
Select the desired sub-menu with the 3 or
4 cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER
button.
2.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI
Assign the number of an HDMI input jack to the
device.
1-1 FUNC INPUT SETUP
(ASSIGNABLE DIGITAL INPUT)
1-2 7.1 CH INPUT SETUP
Select desired channel with the 3 or 4 cursor
buttons.
4.
5.
This menu is for adjusting the speaker levels for 7.1-
channel input sources.
Here you will adjust the volume for each channel so
that they are all heard by the listener at the same
level.
The 6 and F (Front) digital inputs can be assigned to
a desired source.
HDMI and COMPONENT inputs can be assigned to
the preferred source.
Use this menu to select which digital input jacks are
to be assigned to which input source.
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the
volume level of each channel.
Note:
• When FUNCTION MODE is set to HDMI and
HDMI AUDIO of “5. PREFERENCE” is set to
THROUGH, audio is not output from the SR7001.
(See page 36)
Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and
2cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button to
go to the 1.INPUT SETUP menu.
Select “7.1 CH INPUT SETUP” from the
1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3or 4cursor
1.
COMP
Assign the number of a component video input
jack to the device.
Select “FUNC INPUT SETUP” from the
1.INPUT SETUP menu with the 3or 4cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
1.
Note:
7.1CH INPUT SETUP
• The volume level can be set between -12 dB and
+12 dB in 1 dB increments on all channels except the
subwoofer (SUB W), which can be set from -18dB
to +12 dB in 1 dB increments.
VIDEO-IN
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR. L
SUB W
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
LAST
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
0dB
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
V/S
FUNC INPUT SETUP 1
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI COMP V/S
Assign the number of a composite video and S-
video input jack to the device.
TV
:AUTO
1
2
3
4
F
1
2
3
4
-
1
2
3
4
-
1
2
3
4
Notes:
DVD :AUTO
VCR1:AUTO
DSS :AUTO
AUX1:AUTO
• Video and S-video can use the same numbers when
assigning to input functions.
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
• The ✽ mark in AUX.1 indicates that other inputs
cannot be assigned.
Select “VIDEO-IN” with the 3 or 4 cursor
buttons.
2.
3.
RETURN
NEXTT EXIT
Press the OK/ENTER button.
3.
4.
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the
video input source to be played through the
MONITOR OUT jack.
Select a setting with the 3, 4, 1, and 2cursor
buttons, and assign a mode and input jack
(DIG, HDMI, COMP, V/S).
2.
Select each mode setting and input terminal
with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
The input source is switched by pressing the
Press the OK/ENTER button.
5.
6.
7.
MODE
1
or 2cursor buttons as follows;
Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.
AUTO:
LAST ↔ TV ↔ DVD ↔ VCR1 ↔ DSS ↔
AUX1 ↔ V-OFF ↔ LAST ↔...
After you complete this portion of the setup,
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1,
and 2 cursor buttons and then press the OK/
ENTER button to go to the next page.
Select “AUTO”, for automatic detection of the
digital input signal condition.
If there is no digital signal, but there is an analog
signal present, the analog signal will be played.
"AUTO" is the initial setting of all input sources.
Notes:
•
When “LAST” is selected, the source is set to the
source selected before the 7.1 ch input menu was
activated.
FUNC INPUT SETUP 2
FUNC:MODE DIG HDMI C0MP V/S
HDMI:
Select “HDMI”, when only a HDMI signal will be
• When
“V-OFF” is selected, no signal is emitted from
TAPE:ANA
CD/R:AUTO
AUX2:ANA
-
5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
used
.
MONITOR OUT jack.
DIG:
Select “DIG”, when only a digital signal will be
used.
ANA:
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
Select “ANA” for input sources for which no digital
Repeat steps 2-5 until all items are set.
input jacks are used.
8.
After you complete this portion of the setup,
move the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4,
1, and 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/
ENTER button.
DIG
6 and F(Front) digital inputs can be assigned to a
desired source.
Assign the number of a digital input jack to the
device.
To return to the Func Input Setup 1 menu from
the Func Input Setup 2 menu, move the cursor
to “BACK” with the 3, 4, 1, and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
Note:
• Assignments cannot be made in sections with a ✽
mark.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1-3 FUNCTION RENAME
Repeat steps 5-8 until the new name is input.
9.
Input sources can be registered under any name.
This menu is for renaming input source.
BACK:
This menu is for renaming function name. Names
can be up to 10 characters long, including spaces.
(Characters are selected from those appearing on
the display.) This name appears on the receiver's FL
display and the OSD, but it does not appear in the
OSD Setup menu.
Deletes the character left of the cursor in the
“RENAME” area one character at a time.
DEFAULT:
Restores the name in the “RENAME” area to the
name in the “FUNCTION” area.
SPACE:
Insertsaspaceatthecursorpointofthe“RENAME”
area.
Select “FUNCTION RENAME” from the 1.
INPUT SETUP menu with the 3 or 4 cursor
1.
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
Note:
FUNCTION RENAME
• RENAME cannot be left blank.
FUNCTION: TV
RENAME
: _T_V________
Move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, and
2cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to
go to the 1. INPUT SETUP menu.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV
WXYZabcdefghijklmnopqr
stuvwxyz0123456789!"#$
.
*
%&’() +, ./:;<=>?
_{|}SPACE BACK DEFAULT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 or 4 cursor
buttons.
2.
Select an input source with the 1 or 2 cursor
buttons.
3.
4.
Select “RENAME” with the 3 or 4 cursor
buttons.
Move the cursor to the character (1st to 10th) to
change with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
5.
6.
Move the cursor to the character list with the 4
cursor button. (Move the cursor to the letter “A”
to begin with.)
Select a character with the 3, 4, 1, and 2
cursor buttons.
7.
8.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selected letter.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2.SPKR SETUP
AUTO SETUP
2 SPKR (SPEAKER) SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
After you have installed the SR7001 connected all
the components and determined the speaker layout,
it is now time to perform the settings in the Speaker
Setup menu for the optimum sound acoustics for
your environment and speaker layout.
Before you perform the following settings, it is
important that you first determine the following
characteristics:
THX AUDIO SETUP
RETURN
EXIT
P. 28
P. 31
P. 32
☞
☞
☞
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP
SPEAKER SIZE
THX AUDIO SETUP
•
THX SPKR
SUB W
FRONT
CENTER
SURR.
SURR.B
SURR.B SIZE : SMALL
LPF/HPF
BASS MIX
: NO
: YES
: SMALL
: SMALL
: SMALL
: 2CH
AUTO SETUP:
“2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ Setup)”
AUTO SETUP: START
ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY
SURR.B SPKR
MAIN ROOM
NOW ANALYZING!!
CANCEL
:TOGETHER
(see page 28)
SURR BACK:
2CH
•
•
MANUAL SETUP:
“2-2 MANUAL SETUP” (see page 31)
: 80Hz
:
THX AUDIO SETUP:
RETURN
EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
EXIT
“2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP” (see page 32)
Select “2.SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN MENU
with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/
ENTER button.
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP
SPEAKER DISTANCE
1.
UNIT
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ft
SPEAKERS CHECK:--
NOW ANALYZING !!
CANCEL
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
SUB W
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
______________
NOW CALCULATE !!
2.SPKR SETUP
AUTO SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
THX AUDIO SETUP
EXIT
RETURN
BACK NEXT EXIT
AUTO SETUP
CHECK RESULT
SPEAKER LEVEL
RETURN
EXIT
TEST MODE
FRONT L
CENTER
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MANUAL
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK
SPEAKER CONFIG
SPEAKER SIZE
DISTANCE
CHANNEL LEVEL
CROSSOVER FREQ
1ST MIC POSITION!!
FRONT R
SURR.R
Select the desired menu with the 3or 4cursor
buttons, and press the OK/ENTER button.
2.
START
CHECK
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
STORE
SUB W
Note:
EXIT
EXIT
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
• After you complete this the portion of the setup,
press the OK/ENTER button. The cursor will move
to “RETURN” and press the OK/ENTER button to
go to the Sub-menu.
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Use a stand or tripod to position the microphone at
ear height in the listening position.
Note:
2-1 AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ SETUP)
Calibration Check
7.
• The detection check measures the state of use of all
speakers whether actually used or not.
The AUTO SETUP (MultEQ™ Setup) feature of
the SR7001 measures sound characteristics of the
speaker system and room where the receiver is used
and automatically optimizes settings.
AUTO SETUP
• Remove any obstructions between the speakers and
microphone.
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK
For example, if the center speaker is not used, the
test tone will require time to go from the L-channel
to the R-channel, therefore be careful not to unplug
the microphone or operate the SR7001 during this
time.
• To use the internal subwoofer of the amp, set the
volume to the middle point and set the crossover
frequency to the highest.
1ST MIC POSITION!!
START
CHECK
The Audyssey MultEQ™ technology adopted by the
SR7001 provides the best listening environment for
multiple listeners.
To do this, the AUTO SETUP feature measures a
test tone emitted by each channel in a maximum of 6
listening positions, using the supplied microphone.
The measurement results are analyzed using an
original algorithm and environmental settings are
made to improve the sound characteristics of the
listening area.
• Duringmeasurement,stepawayfromthemicrophone
and operate the SR7001 via the remote control unit
from a position that is out of the path of the speaker
sound.
EXIT
When the detection check ends, the following
OSD appears on the display.
6.
Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons
and press the OK/ENTER button to measure
the first point (main listening position).
• The test tone output from the speakers during
measurement is loud. Be mindful of neighbors and
watch out for small children.
AUTO SETUP
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK
During measurement, the following OSD
appears on the display. At this point, you can
cancel measurement by selecting “CANCEL”
with the 3/4 cursor buttons and pressing the
OK/ENTER button.
1ST MIC POSITION!!
Either press the MultEQ™ button on the
front panel of the SR7001 or select “2. SPKR
SETUP” from the MAIN MENU, select “AUTO
SETUP” with the 3/4 cursor buttons, and
press the OK/ENTER button to display the start
screen.
START
CHECK
3.
4.
To set up the speaker system (i.e., adjusting speaker
distance, etc.) without using theAUTO SETUP feature,
see “MANUAL SETUP” on page 31 of the manual.
EXIT
AUTO SETUP
Here, to view the results of the detection check,
select “CHECK” with the 3/4 cursor buttons
and press the OK/ENTER button. The results
will be displayed.
HOW TO PERFORM AUTO SETUP
During measurement, the OSD menu displays the
condition, therefore turn power to the monitor on.
Select the number of channels for the surround
back speaker you are using.
NOW ANALYZING!!
CANCEL
For a 5.1 channel speaker system, select
“NON” (Surround Back speaker off). (To use
speaker C or multi speaker, select “NON”. See
page 20, 37.)
SPEAKER CONFIG
Connect the supplied microphone to the MIC
jack on the SR7001.
1.
CHECK !!
SPEAKER
FRONT : YES
EXIT
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
: NON
: YES
: YES
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR7500
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
When this measurement ends, the following
OSD appears on the display
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SURROUND
DIGITAL
Select “START” with the 3/4 cursor buttons
and press the OK/ENTER button to start
measurement.
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6
.
1
N
I
G
H
T
SURR.B R : NON
SURR.B L : NON
L
C
LFE
S
R
A
AC
PCM
SL
SR
DOWN
UP
SURR.L
SUB W
: YES
: YES
AUTO SETUP
STANDBY
ENTER
AUX
1
INPUT
VIDEO
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
DIGITAL
S-VIDEO
L
AUDIO
R
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP: START
MAIN ROOM
RETURN
EXIT
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK
2ND MIC POSITION!!
START
Ifthecheckresultsindicateanerror,takesuitable
action with that item and remeasure. (For error
messages, see “ERROR MESSAGES” on
page 30.)
CALCULATE
SURR BACK:
2CH
Set the microphone in the listening position.
2.
EXIT
After confirming the check results, select
“RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor buttons and
press the OK/ENTER button to return to the
OSD menu.
RETURN
EXIT
Detection Check
5.
During the detection check, the following
OSD appears on the display and checks are
made to detect dark sound in the listening
room, whether there are speakers or not and
polarity.
At this point, you can select “EXIT” to end Auto
Setup and return to “2. SPKR SETUP”.
AUTO SETUP
SPEAKERS CHECK:--
NOW ANALYZING !!
CANCEL
Notes:
• Measurement can be done in a maximum of 6
listening positions.
For the first measurement, set the microphone in the
main listening position.
EXIT
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
[Example] Confirmation screen for speaker size and
Note:
Pressing “EXIT” prior to pressing “STORE” erases all
8. Move the microphone to the second listening
position, select “START” with the 3/4 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to
measure the second point. At this point, you
can cancel second point measurement and
calculate measurement results by selecting
“CALCULATE” and pressing the OK/ENTER
button.
Checking Measurement Results
8.
10.
crossover frequency
When calculations for the measurement results
end, a screen appears for confirming the
calculation results.
measurement results and calculation results, therefore
operate the remote control unit with care.
SPEAKER SIZE
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
: AUTO
: AUTO
: AUTO
: AUTO
: AUTO
: AUTO
: AUTO
: AUTO
CHECK RESULT
When storing operations end, the following OSD
appears on the display.
SPEAKER CONFIG
SPEAKER SIZE
DISTANCE
CHANNEL LEVEL
CROSSOVER FREQ
2.SPKR SETUP
SUB W
AUTO SETUP
MANUAL SETUP
AUTO SETUP
RETURN
NEXT
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK
STORE
THX AUDIO SETUP
2ND MIC POSITION!!
START
CROSSOVER FREQ
EXIT
CALCULATE
FRONT
: AUTO
Select items to check with the 3/4 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to
enter them.
CENTER : AUTO
RETURN
EXIT
SURR
: AUTO
SURR.B : AUTO
EXIT
Note:
Note:
Repeat steps 7 and 8 until measuring 6
points between the main listening position and
surrounding positions.
9.
To check equalizer (MultEQ) parameters, see page
39.
Do not turn the power to the SR7001 off while storing
parameters in memory. This may erase all data in the
SR7001’s memory and may damage the receiver.
RETURN
* AUTO is displayed to indicate that the speaker
size and crossover frequency results were
automatically measured.
When all measurements end, the following
OSD appears on the display.
[Example] Confirmation screen for speaker detection
SPEAKER CONFIG
CHECK !!
SPEAKER
AUTO SETUP
FRONT : YES
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R : NON
SURR.B L : NON
: NON
: YES
: YES
SPEAKERS CHECK:OK
Storing Measurement Results in Memory
11.
Once finished confirming the measurement
results, select “RETURN” with the 3/4 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to
display the CHECK RESULT screen.
CALCULATE
SURR.L
SUB W
: YES
: YES
RETURN
NEXT
EXIT
CHANNEL
LEVEL
FRONT L
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB
[Example] Confirmation screen for the distance from
Select “CALCULATE” with the 3/4 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button
to calculate measurement results. During
calculations, the following OSD appears on the
display.
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
SUB W
-6.5dB
-1.5dB
+1.0dB
+9.5dB
speakers to the listening position
DISTANCE
UNIT
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ft
: +12.0dB
-2.5dB
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
SUB W
30.00ft
19.33ft
29.66ft
21.50ft
12.33ft
11.66ft
16.33ft
12.50ft
:
: -12.5dB
AUTO SETUP
RETURN
NEXT
______________
NOW CALCULATE !!
CHECK RESULT
RETURN
NEXT
SPEAKER CONFIG
SPEAKER SIZE
DISTANCE
CHANNEL LEVEL
CROSSOVER FREQ
* The units can be changed by moving the cursor to
[ft] of UNIT and pressing 1/ 2the cursor buttons.
Each time a 1 / 2 cursor button is pressed,
the units alternate between [ft] (feet) and [m]
(meters).
EXIT
Note:
STORE
• Less than 6 positions can be measured, but it is
recommended to measure in all 6 positions in order
to obtain the best results.
EXIT
Place the cursor on “STORE” and press the
OK/ENTER button to store all parameters
including the equalizer parameters in memory.
If not wanting to store the calculation results in
memory, place the cursor on “EXIT” and press
the OK/ENTER button.
• The time needed to complete calculations depends
on the number of connected speakers and measured
listening positions. The more speakers and listening
positions, the more time is needed.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ERROR MESSAGES
Displayed Error
Cause
How to Remedy
• Connect the included microphone.
MIC SET ERROR!!
• The microphone is not properly connected.
AUTO SETUP
AUTO SETUP: START
MAIN ROOM
• Check the microphone connection.
SURR BACK:
2CH
MIC SET ERROR!!
RETURN
EXIT
NOISE ERROR!!
• There is too much noise in the listening room to measure properly.
• Volume from the speakers is low.
• During measurement, turn off devices that make noise such as air
conditioners.
AUTO SETUP
• Measure at a time when the surrounding area is quiet.
SPEAKERS CHECK:
NOISE ERROR !!
RETURN
EXIT
ANALYZE ERROR!!
• The speakers required for suitable playback were not detected.
• Speaker polarity is connected backwards.
• Check the speaker that is indicated as having reversed polarity
AUTO SETUP
([REV] can appear with some speakers even when properly
connected. In such case, ignore the error indication.)
SPEAKERS CHECK:
• Check speaker direction and layout
ANALYZE ERROR !!
In the examples at left, the following trouble is detected.
• The polarity of the left and right channels of the front speakers is
backwards ([REV] appears on the display.)
• The surround speaker is not connected ([NON] is displayed), but
the surround back speaker is connected
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
* Under ANALYZE ERROR, select “NEXT” with the 3/4 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button. A detail screen like the
following appears on the display.
(In this kind of situation, [ERR] is displayed for all surround and
surround back speakers.)
SPEAKER CONFIG
CHECK !!
SPEAKER
FRONT L : YES
REV
An error is indicated in addition to the above if the speakers are
connected as follows.
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
: NON
: YES
: NON ERR
REV
• When using just one surround back speaker, but it is connected to
the surround back R-channel
SURR.B R : YES ERR
SURR.B L : YES ERR
SURR.L
SUB W
: NON ERR
: YES
(To use just one surround back speaker, connect it to the L-
channel.)
RETURN
EXIT
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUB W
SURR. BACK SIZE
2-2 MANUAL SETUP
<SPEAKER DISTANCE>
YES:
LARGE:
SPEAKER DISTANCE
Select “2. SPKR SETUP” from the MAIN
MENU.
Select when a subwoofer is connected.
Select if the surround back speakers are large.
SMALL:
1.
2.
3.
UNIT
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ft
NO:
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
SUB W
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
10.0 ft
Select when a subwoofer is not connected.
Select if the surround back speakers are small.
Select “MANUAL SETUP” with the 3 or
4
Note:
cursor buttons.
FRONT
LARGE:
• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then
this setting is not available.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
Select if the front speakers are large.
RETURN
BACK NEXT EXIT
SMALL:
LPF/HPF
<SPEAKER SIZE>
Select if the front speakers are small.
When you use a subwoofer, you can select the cutoff
frequency for the small speakers used. Select one of
the crossover frequency levels according to the size
of the small speakers connected.
60Hz → 80Hz → 100Hz → 120Hz → 140Hz →
160Hz → 180Hz
Use this menu to specify the distance of each
speaker’s position from the listening position. The
delay time is automatically calculated according to
these distances.
Begin by determining the ideal or most commonly
used seating position in the room.
This is important for the timing of the acoustics to
create the proper sound space that the SR7001 and
today’s sound systems are able to produce.
• If “NO” is selected for the subwoofer setting, then
this setting is fixed at “LARGE”.
SPEAKER SIZE
THX SPKR
: NO
SUB W
FRONT
CENTER
SURR.
SURR.B
: YES
: SMALL
: SMALL
: SMALL
: 2CH
CENTER
NONE:
Select if no center speaker is connected.
LARGE:
Select if the center speaker is large.
SMALL:
Select if the center speaker is small.
SURR.B SIZE : SMALL
LPF/HPF
BASS MIX
: 80Hz
:
Note:
• If using small front speakers, set a slightly higher
frequency. If using large front speakers, set a slightly
lower frequency.
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
Note:
When setting the speaker size in the SPEAKER
SIZE menu, use the guidelines below.
LARGE:
The complete frequency range for the channel you
are setting will be output from the speaker.
SMALL:
Frequencies of the channel you are setting that
are lower than approx. 80 Hz will be output from
the subwoofer.
If the SUB. W is set to “NONE” and the front
speakers are set to “LARGE,” then the sound will
be output from both the left and right speakers.
• For speakers for which you have selected “NONE”,
the speaker configuration sub-menu will not appear
here. (There are several useful books and special
DVD and LD’s available to guide you through proper
home theater configuration. If you are unsure, have
your Marantz dealer perform the installation for you.
They are trained professionals familiar with even
the most sophisticated custom installations. Marantz
information.)
BASS MIX
SURR.
NONE:
• The bass mix setting is only valid when “LARGE”
is set for the front speakers and “YES” is set for the
subwoofer during stereo playback.
Select if no surround left and right speakers are
connected.
LARGE:
Select if the surround left and right speakers are
large.
This setting has effect only during playback of
PCM or analog stereo sources.
• When “BOTH” is selected, the low frequencies will
be played through the main L&R speakers and the
subwoofer.
SMALL:
Select if the surround left and right speakers are
small.
In this playback mode, the low frequency range
expands more uniformly throughout the room, but
depending on the size and shape of the room,
interference may result in a decrease of the actual
volume of the low frequency range.
Select either m (meters) or ft (feet) for UNIT
with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
8.
SURR. B
NONE:
Select if no surround back left and right speakers
are connected.
2CH:
Select if the surround back left and right speakers
are connected.
1CH:
Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor
9.
Select each speaker with the 3 or 4 cursor
buttons.
buttons.
4.
Set the distance for each speaker , press the 1
or 2cursor buttons.
• By selecting “MIX”, the low frequencies will play
through the main L&R only. This selection is
preferred by THX.
10.
Set the size of each speaker with the 1 or
2
5.
6.
cursor buttons.
FRONT L:
After you complete this portion of the setup,
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1and
2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER
button to go to the next page.
Note:
Set the distance from the front left speaker to your
normal listening position.
• LFE signals during playback of Dolby Digital or
DTS will be played through the subwoofer.
Select if one surround back speaker is connected.
In this case, the audio signal is emitted from the
SURR BACK LEFT output terminal.
CENTER:
Set the distance from the center speaker to your
normal listening position.
THX SPKR
After you complete this portion of the setup,
Notes:
7.
FRONT R:
If you are using a full THX speaker systems which
are approved by THX Ltd:
• The front, center and surround speaker size
should be “SMALL”.
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1
and 2cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER
button to go to the next page.
• If “NONE” is selected for the SURR. setting, then
this setting is fixed to “NONE.”
Set the distance from the front right speaker to
your normal listening position.
SURR. L:
Set the distance from the surround left speaker to
your normal listening position.
SURR. R:
• The subwoofer should be “YES”.
• LPF/HPF (the crossover frequency) should be
“80Hz”.
Set the distance from the surround right speaker to
your normal listening position.
You need to set the number of surround back
speakers and the surround back speaker size should
be “SMALL”.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUB W:
Set the distance from the subwoofer to your
normal listening position.
TEST MODE:
Select “MANUAL” or “AUTO” generation of the
test tone with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
Note:
2-3 THX AUDIO SETUP
• If you set SURR.B = 1CH or NONE in the
SPEAKER SIZE menu, Advanced Speaker Array
will not be activated.
You can set the advanced Speaker Array.
SURR. B L:
Set the distance from the surround back left
speaker to your normal listening position.
SURR. B R:
Set the distance from the surround back right
speaker to your normal listening position.
If you select “AUTO”, the test tone will be cycled
through in a circular pattern beginning at Left →
Center → Right → Surround Right → Surround
Back Right → Surround Back Left → Surround
Left → Subwoofer → Left, in 2 seconds increments
for each channel.
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, adjust the volume
level of the noise from the speaker so that it is the
same level for all the speakers.
Select “2. SPEAKER SETUP” from the MAIN
MENU.
1.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move
the cursor to “RETURN” with 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press OK/ENTER button to go to the 2.
SPKR SETUP menu.
Select “THX AUDIO SETUP” with the 3 or
4
2.
3.
cursor buttons.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
Notes:
• Set the distance to each speaker in meters (m) or feet
(ft) as follows.
THX AUDIO SETUP
m: 0.03 - 9.15 m in 0.03 m steps
ft: 0.1 - 30.0 ft in 0.1 ft steps
ADVANCED SPKR ARRAY
SURR.B SPKR
:TOGETHER
If you select “MANUAL”, adjust the output level of
each speaker as listed below.
(The values appearing on the FL display are
approximate.)
• For the speakers that you have selected “NONE” the
Move the cursor to FRONT L by pressing the
4 cursor button. The SR7001 will emit a pink
noise from the front left speaker.
12.
speaker size menu will not appear.
RETURN
EXIT
• The setting for surr.back L and surr.back R appears
if it is set, two surround back speakers in the
SPEAKER SIZE menu.
Remember the level of this noise and then
Advanced Speaker Array (ASA)
press the 4cursor button.
• The setting of SURR. BACK appears if it is set for
one surround back speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE
menu.
SURR.B SPKR:TOGETHER, CLOSE or APART
The best ASA effect is when the surround back
speakers are together and facing forward.
If the distance between the surround back speakers
is,
• Less than 12 in. (30 cm): TOGETHER
• Greater than 12 in. (30 cm), and less than 48 in.
(122 cm): CLOSE
(Note that this can be adjusted to any level
between -12 and +12 dB in 0.5 dB increments.)
The SR7001 will now emit the pink noise from
the center speaker.
After you complete this portion of the setup,
11.
move the cursor to “NEXT” with the 3, 4, 1and
2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER
button to go to the next page.
Using the 1 and 2 cursor buttons, adjust the
13.
volume level of the noise from the center
speaker so that it is the same level as the front
left speaker.
• Greater than 48 in. (122 cm): APART
<SPEAKER LEVEL>
Press the 4cursor button again. The SR7001
will now emit the pink noise from the front right
speaker.
14.
Speaker type and positioning
This diagram shows the desired positioning for 7.1
channel speaker systems used in ASA mode. During
system setup, select the distance between surround
back speakers.
S PEAKER LEVEL
TES T MODE
FRONT L
CENTER
FRONT R
S URR.R
S URR.B R
S URR.B L
S URR.L
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
MANUAL
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Repeat steps 13 and 14 for the front right and
other speakers until all speakers are adjusted
to the same volume level.
15.
FL
C
FR
Front-L
Center
Front-R
S UB W
After you complete this portion of the setup, press the
OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to “RETURN”.
Press the OK/ENTER button to go to “2. SPKR
SETUP”.
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
Di-polar Radiating Speaker
Direct Radiating Speaker
Here you can set the volume for each speaker so
that they are all heard by the listener at the same
level. We recommend holding a dB SPL (Sound
Pressure Level) meter at the listening position, at
arms length, and pointing straight up at the ceiling,
adjust the level of each speaker in turn unit it reads
75dB SPL when the meter is set to “C” weighting and
Slow responce.
Surround-L
Surround-R
Notes:
SL
SR
• Speakers for which you selected “NONE” in the
SPEAKER SIZE menu will not appear.
Surround A
Surround A
• Surr. Back L and Surr. Back R appear if it is set for
two surround back speakers in the SPEAKER SIZE
menu.
Surround Back
L
R
SBL SBR
Surround B
• Surr. Back appears if it is set for one surround back
speaker in the SPEAKER SIZE menu.
Note:
• To adjust the speaker levels for 7.1 channel input
sources, you will need to use the 7.1 Ch Input sub
menu. (See page 33)
• The speaker level settings are not available in 7.1
Channel Input mode, Pure Direct mode and Source
Direct mode.
• SUB W can be set from –18dB to +12dB.
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3.SURR SETUP
3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL
3 SURROUND SETUP
CHANNEL LEVEL
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER
CS PARAMETER
NEO:6 PARAMETER
Select “3. SURR SETUP” from MAIN MENU
with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/
ENTER button.
1.
2.
3.
This menu is for setting surround effect parameters
for the various surround input signals so as to bring
out the live audio effect of your speaker system.
RE-EQ
LFE LEVEL
: OFF
:
•
•
•
•
CHANNEL LEVEL:
Select “CHANNEL LEVEL” with the 3 or
cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER
button.
4
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
“3-1 CHANNEL LEVEL” (see page 33)
PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER:
“3-2 PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” (see page 34)
P. 33
P. 34
☞
☞
CSII PARAMETER:
Set the SURR. MODE with the 1 or 2 cursor
buttons.
CHANNEL
SURR.MODE:
AUTO
LEVEL
CS
PARAMETER
: 0
“3-3 CSII PARAMETER” (see page 34)
NEO:6 PARAMETER:
CHANNEL
SURR.MODE:
AUTO
LEVEL
TRUBASS
CENTER
SURR.R
SURR.B R
SURR.B L
SURR.L
SUB W
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
SRS DIALOG : 0
“3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER” (see page 34)
CENTER
SURR.L
SURR.R
SURR.BACK L
SURR.BACK R
SUB W
:
:
:
:
:
:
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
0.0dB
Select “3. SURR SETUP” from the MAIN
MENU with the 3or 4cursor buttons and press
1.
RETURN
EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
the OK/ENTER button.
RETURN
EXIT
Select the desired menu with the 3or 4cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
2.
P. 34
P. 34
☞
☞
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER
NEO:6 PARAMETER
Select the desired menu item with the 3 or
4
4.
3.SURR SETUP
cursor buttons, set the desired level with the 1
or 2cursor buttons, and press the OK/ENTER
button.
PARAMETER
:DEFAULT
CENTER GAIN : 0.3
CHANNEL LEVEL
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER
PARAMETER
NEO:6 PARAMETER
PANORAMA
DIMENSION
CENTER WIDTH: 3
:OFF
: 0
CS
RE-EQ
LFE LEVEL
: OFF
:
SURROUND MODE:
The surround mode can be independently set for
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
3 modes.
1. Multi Ch STEREO
2. CSII
3. Others
RE-EQ:
Turns THX Cinema Re-EQ™ on and off.
Select the Cinema Re-EQ™ with the 1or 2cursor
button to activate it.
Note:
• After you complete this portion of the setup, press
the OK/ENTER button to move the cursor to
“RETURN” and press the OK/ENTER button
again to go to sub-menu.
CHANNEL LEVEL
LFE LEVEL:
CENTER LEVEL:
Set the effect level of the center speaker between
–12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .
• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will
not appear.
SURR L or R LEVEL:
Set the effect level of the Surround speaker
between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .
Select the output level of the LFE signal included
in the Dolby Digital signal or the DTS signal.
Select “0dB”, “–10 dB” or “OFF” with 1or 2cursor
button.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move
the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1, 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
• If “NONE” was selected for the surround speakers
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will
not appear.
SURR. BACK L or R LEVEL:
Set the effect level of the Surround Back speaker
between –12 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .
• If “NONE” was selected for the surround back
speakers setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this
setting will not appear.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SUB W LEVEL:
Set the effect level of the subwoofer speaker
between –18 and +12 level in 0.5 level interval .
• If “NONE” was selected for the subwoofer speaker
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE, then this setting will
not appear.
If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting
cannot be selected.
3-4 NEO:6 PARAMETER
3-2 PLIIx (PRO LOGIC IIx) MUSIC PARAMETER
The DTS NEO:6 mode enables a maximum 6.1
channel output with just 2 channel input. (It also
supports 5.1 channel input.)
This mode expands the sound image from the center
channel.
Pro LogicIIx-Music mode creates a rich and
enveloping surround ambience from stereo sources
such as CDs.
In this mode, the SR7001 includes three controls to
fine-tune the sound field as follows.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
Note:
• Setting to a mode other than multichannel stereo or
CSIIwill affect the speaker level as explained in “2-2
MANUAL SETUP”.
Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and
press the OK/ENTER button.
Select “3. SURR SETUP” in MAIN MENU
with 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/
ENTER button.
1.
1.
3-3 CSII PARAMETER
Select “3. SURROUND SETUP” from MAIN
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and
1.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button to go to the
3. SURR SETUP menu.
Select “NEO:6 PARAMETER” with the 3or
4
Select “PLIIx MUSIC PARAMETER” with the
press the OK/ENTER button.
2.
3.
2.
cursor buttons.
3
or 4cursor buttons.
Select “CS II PARAMETER” with the 3 or
cursor buttons.
4
2.
3.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
3.
NEO:6 PARAMETER
PL x MUSIC PARAMETER
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
CENTER GAIN : 0.3
PARAMETER
:DEFAULT
CS
PARAMETER
PANORAMA
DIMENSION
:OFF
: 0
TRUBASS
SRS DIALOG : 0
: 0
CENTER WIDTH: 3
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
PARAMETER:
Select “DEFAULT” or “CUSTOM” with the 1 or 2
cursor buttons.
If you select “CUSTOM”, you can adjust three
parameters as listed below.
Set the CENTER GAIN level between 0.0 and
1.0 in 0.1 level increments with the 1or 2cursor
buttons.
4.
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
TRUBASS:
Set the TRUBASS level between 0 and 6 in 1- level
increments with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
PANORAMA:
Select the PANORAMA mode “ON” or “OFF” with
the 1or 2cursor buttons.
Panorama wraps the sound of the front left and right
speakers around you, for an exciting perspective.
TRUBASS produced by the speakers are an octave
below the actual physical capabilities of the speakers
adding exciting, deeper bass effects.
SRS DIALOG:
Notes:
Set the SRS DIALOG level between 0 and 6 in 1-
increments with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
This can be popped out of the surround audio
effects, allowing the listener to easily discern what
the actors say.
DIMENSION:
• This parameter can only be set in the NEO:6-Music
mode.
Set the DIMENSION level between –3 and +3
level in 1 level intervals with the 1 or 2 cursor
buttons.
• If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting is
disabled.
Adjust the sound field either towards the front or
towards the rear.
This can be useful to help achieve a more
suitable balance from all the speakers with certain
recordings.
If “NONE” was selected for the center speaker
setting in the SPEAKER SIZE menu, this setting
cannot be selected.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
CENTER WIDTH:
Set the CENTER WIDTH level between 0 and 7 in
1 level intervals with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
Center width allows you to gradually spread the
center channel sound into the front left and right
speakers.
Note:
• This parameter can only be set in the CSIImode.
At its widest setting, all the sound from the center
is mixed into the left and right speakers.
This control may help achieve a more spacious
sound or a better blend for the front image.
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
•
COMPONENT OUT
4-1 VIDEO CONVERT
4 VIDEO SETUP
(This feature is not available on the SR7001.)
The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals for
monitor output.
This section explains how to set up conversion for
each type of video input.
Video settings are made as follows.
This setting is for selecting whether to output
the images for the main room or the images for
the multi room system to the COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT 2 terminal. Select the output
destination between MAIN and MULTI with the 1/
2cursor buttons.
Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN
MENU with the 3/4 cursor buttons and press
1.
the OK/ENTER button.
Select “4. VIDEO SETUP” from the MAIN
MENU with the 3/ 4cursor buttons and press
1.
4.VIDEO SETUP
Note:
• When MULTI 1 is selected, video signals converted
VIDEO CONVERT
the OK/ENTER button.
.
TV AUTO
:DISABLE
:ENABLE
:ENABLE
:OUTPUT1
:MAIN
OSD
INFO
from the MONITOR OUT 2 terminal are not
output.
I/P CONVERT
HDMI OUT
COMPO OUT2
Select “VIDEO CONVERT” with the 3/ 4cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
2.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1and 2cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
VIDEO CONVERT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
TV
DVD
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
ANA&HDMI
VCR1
DSS
AUX1
TAPE
CD/R
AUX2
Select the desired menu with the 3/4 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
2.
•
VIDEO CONVERT
“4-1 VIDEO CONVERT”
TV-AUTO
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
•
Select the TV AUTO ON/OFF function to enable
or disable with the 1or 2cursor buttons. (refer to
page 46)
Select “FUNCTION” with the 3 / 4 cursor
buttons and set the video conversion mode
with the 1/ 2cursor buttons
3.
•
OSD INFO
Select the OSD information function to “ENABLE”
or “DISABLE” with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
If you select “ENABLE”, the SR7001 will display
the status of the feature (Volume up/down, input
select, etc..) on the monitor. If you do not desire
this information, select “DISABLE”.
ANA&HDMI:
This mode both up-converts and down-converts
analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,
Component Video). Furthermore, it up-converts
from analog video signal to HDMI. (It cannot down-
convert from HDMI digital video signals to analog
video signals.)
Note:
• OSD information is not output to Monitor Output
ANA ONLY:
This mode both up-converts and down-converts
analog video signals (Composite Video, S-Video,
Component Video). It does not up-convert to
HDMI.
of HDMI and Component Video. However, OSD
information is output if the Video Convert function
is used to output Video or S-Video video signals to
Monitor Out of HDMI and Component Video.
OFF:
For details, refer to“VIDEO CONVERT”on page 41.
This mode turns off all conversion features.
•
•
Note:
• For details on video convert feature, see page 41.
IP CONVERT
Select the IP CONVERT ON/OFF function to
enable or disable with the 1 or 2 cursor buttons.
(refer to page 41)
HDMI OUT
(This feature is not available on the SR7001.)
This setting is for selecting which output terminal,
HDMI 1 or HDMI 2, to output the signal to. Select
the output destination with the 1 / 2 cursor
buttons.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5.PREFERENCE
5 PREFERENCE
MULTI ROOM SETUP A B
DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2
•
•
MULTI ROOM SETUP :
STANDBY
BILINGUAL : MAIN
HDMI AUDIO: ENABLEH
: NORMAL
“5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP” (see page 37)
DC TRIGGER SETUP :
“5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP” (see page 37)
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the
1.
OK/ENTER button.
DC TRIGGER SETUP
DC TRIG-1:DISABLE
TV
MULTI ROOM SETUP A
5.PREFERENCE
VIDEO
AUDIO
SLEEP
:DVD
:DVD
:OFF
TV
:
:
TAPE
CD/R
AUX2
TUNER :
7.1CH :
:
:
:
MULTI ROOM SETUP A B
DC TRIGGER SETUP 1 2
DVD
VCR1 :
DSS
MONO/ST:STEREO
:
STANDBY
BILINGUAL : MAIN
HDMI AUDIO: ENABLEH
: NORMAL
AUX1 :
MULT:OFF
VOL :VARI
MSPK:
VOL :
LEV :-90dB LEV :
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
RETURN BACK
EXIT
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
DC TRIGGER SETUP
DC TRIG-2:DISABLE
MULTI ROOM SETUP B
Select the desired menu with the 3or 4cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
2.
TV
DVD
VCR1 :
DSS
AUX1 :
:
:
TAPE
CD/R
AUX2
TUNER :
7.1CH :
:
:
:
AUDIO
SLEEP
:DVD
:OFF
STAND BY:
MONO/ST:STEREO
:
When this is set to “ECONOMY”, you can reduce
the power consumption when the unit is in the
Standby mode. When “ECONOMY” is selected,
“TV AUTO” and “RS-232C” are disabled when the
unit is in the Standby mode.
MULT:OFF
VOL :VARI
MSPK:
VOL :
LEV :-90dB LEV :
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
RETURN BACK
EXIT
(The SR7001 is not equipped
with the MULTI ROOM SETUP
B feature)
BILINGUAL:
In the Bilingual mode, Dolby Digital and DTS
output is set to either “MAIN” or “SUB”. Select
“BILINGUAL” with the 1or 2cursor buttons, then
select MAIN ↔ SUB ↔ MAIN+SUB with the 1or
2cursor buttons.
HDMI AUDIO:
This setting determines whether to play back audio
input to the HDMI jacks through the SR7001 or
output it through the receiver to a TV or projector.
ENABLE: The audio input to the HDMI jacks
can be played back by this receiver.
In such case, audio signals are not
output to the TV or projector.
THROUGH: The audio input to the HDMI jacks is
not output from the speaker terminals
of the SR7001. Audio data is output
directly to the TV or projector. This
setting is used to listen to audio on a
multi channel TV, etc.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MULTI (MULTI ROOM):
5-1 MULTI ROOM SETUP
5-2 DC TRIGGER SETUP
Switch the multiroom output “ON” or “OFF” with
the 1or 2cursor buttons.
The SR8001 has source selectors, sleep timers and
multispeaker output remote control units (Room
A only) for the two other rooms in the multi room
system. (The SR7001 has only one other room in the
multi-room system.)
This unit has 2 DC trigger control jacks, which can
be used to link with input functions for the main room
or multiroom.
MSPK (MULTI SPEAKER):
Switch the speaker output “ON” or “OFF” with the
1or 2cursor buttons.
Each trigger can be setup separately.
VOL (VOLUME SETUP):
These features can be set from this menu.
Select “5. PREFERENCE” from MAIN MENU
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the
1.
Select whether the multiroom or multi speaker
output level is variable or fixed with the 1 or 2
cursor buttons.
Select “5. PREFERENCE” from the MAIN
MENU with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and
OK/ENTER button.
1.
LEVEL (VOLUME LEVEL):
press the OK/ENTER button.
Select “DC TRIGGER SETUP 1or 2” with the
3, 4, 1and 2cursor buttons.
Adjust the multiroom output level with the 1 or 2
cursor buttons. The volume can be set between
-90 dB and 0 dB in 1 dB increments.
2.
Select “MULTI ROOM SETUP” with the 3or 4
cursor buttons and select either “Room A” or
2.
Note:
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
3.
“Room B” with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
• This setting can be changed when the SURR B is
set to “NONE” in the SPEAKER SIZE menu and
“SPEAKER C” is in the OFF position on the rear
panel. When this setting is unavailable, “✽✽✽” is
displayed.
DC TRIGGER SETUP
DC TRIG-1:DISABLE
TV
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
setting.
3.
TV
DVD
VCR1 :
DSS
AUX1 :
:
:
TAPE
CD/R
AUX2
TUNER :
7.1CH :
:
:
:
• If “VOLUME” is set to “FIXED”, the multiroom
output level cannot be adjusted from the A or B
room.
The following explanation shows how to operate
MULTI ROOM A of the multi-room system.
The MULTI ROOM B setting does not have the
VIDEO FUNCTION.
(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B
setting)
:
• MSPK cannot be on for both RoomAand Room B at
the same time. After you complete this portion of the
setup, move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3or
4cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
You can select “MAIN ROOM”, “MULTI
ROOM A”, “MULTI ROOM B”, “REMOTE” or
“DISABLE” with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
MULTI ROOM SETUP A
4.
VIDEO
AUDIO
SLEEP
:DVD
:DVD
:OFF
MONO/ST:STEREO
(The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B
setting)
MULT:OFF
VOL :VARI
MSPK:
VOL :
Note:
LEV :-90dB LEV :
• REMOTE is available for the external control. The
RC8001SR cannot operate the function.
RETURN BACK
EXIT
Select the desired item with the 3or 4 cursor
button.
4.
Select desired input source with the 3 or
cursor buttons.
4
5.
6.
7.
Set to “ON” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor
buttons.
VIDEO:
Select the video source of the multiroom output
with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
AUDIO:
After you complete this portion of the setup,
move the cursor to “RETURN” with the 3 or
4 cursor button and press the OK/ENTER
button.
Select the audio source of the multiroom output
with the 1or 2cursor buttons.
SLEEP:
The sleep mode is available when the multiroom is
active, set the time with 1or 2cursor buttons. The
sleep timer can be set to a maximum 90 minutes
in 10 minute increments.
Note:
• When an input source that is on in the set room is
selected, voltage is output to the DC TRIGGER
output terminal.
MONO/ST:
This mode switches audio output to the multi room
system between MONAURAL and STEREO,
using the 1and 2cursor buttons.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Select “FRONT”, “FLAT”, “AUDYSSEY”,
“PRESET” or “OFF” with the 1 or 2 cursor
buttons.
6 ACOUSTIC EQ
3.
This display is for setting up the equalizer and
changing the Equalizer mode.
After you complete this portion of the setup, move the
cursor to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1 and 2 cursor
buttons and press the OK/ENTER button.
•
•
PRESET G. EQ ADJ :
“6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ” (see page 39)
CHECK AUTO 1 & 2 :
“6-2 CHECK AUTO” (see page 39)
Note:
• “AUDYSSEY”, “FRONT” and “FLAT” can be
selected after executing the AUTO SETUP feature.
EQ MODE:
There are 4 equalizer modes to choose from:
PRESET G. EQ that allows the user to manually
adjust the equalizer, and AUDYSSEY, FRONT and
FLAT that automatically adjust the equalizer from the
measurement results of the AUTO SETUP feature
(see page 28).
• If a speaker that was determined “NON” in Auto
Setup is manually turned on, the “AUDYSSEY”,
“FRONT” and “FLAT” modes cannot be selected.
• The equalizer turns off when the Pure Direct mode,
Source Direct mode, Dolby Headphone or Virtual
mode is set.
AUDYSSEY:
This mode adjusts the frequency characteristics
of all speakers so as to create the best listening
environment for the sound characteristics of the
listening room.
FRONT:
6.ACOUSTIC EQ.
EQ.MODE : OFF
This mode matches the characteristics of each
speaker to those of the front speakers.
FLAT:
PRESET G.EQ1 ADJ
CHECK AUTO
This mode flattens the frequency characteristics of
allspeakers.Itissuitedforplaybackofmultichannel
music such as Dolby Digital and DTS.
PRESET:
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
This mode adjusts the graphic equalizer that
was set in PRESET G.EQ ADJ to adjust the
characteristics of each speaker (see page 39).
PRESET ADJUST
RESET:ALLCH
CHECK AUTO
MD:AUDYSSEY
CH:SR
OFF:
63-15.0
125 -2.5
250 -5.0
500 +9.0
1k +3.5
2k -5.5
4k -7.0
8k-18.5
16k-20.0
63-15.0
125 -2.5
250 -5.0
500 +9.0
1k +3.5
2k -5.5
4k -7.0
8k-18.5
16k-20.0
CH
:SR
The graphic equalizer is not used.
+9
0d
+9
0d
Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the
1.
63 250 1k 4k 16kHz
125 500 2k 8k
63 250 1k 4k 16kHz
125 500 2k 8k
OK/ENTER button.
6.ACOUSTIC EQ.
RETURN
EXIT
RETURN
EXIT
EQ.MODE
: OFF
PRESET G.EQ ADJ
CHECK AUTO
RETURN
NEXT EXIT
Select “EQ. MODE” with the 3 or 4 cursor
buttons.
2.
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6-1 PRESET G. EQ ADJ
6-2 CHECK AUTO
These modes allow you to set a 9-band graphic
equalizer for each of the 7 channels.
These menus are for confirming the results of
AUTO SETUP function equalizer measurement
(AUDYSSEY, FRONT, FLAT).
Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the
OK/ENTER button.
1.
Select “6. ACOUSTIC EQ” from MAIN MENU
with the 3 or 4 cursor buttons and press the
1.
OK/ENTER button.
Select “PRESET G. EQ ADJ” with the 3 or
cursor buttons.
4
2.
3.
Select “CHECK AUTO” with the
buttons.
3
or
4
cursor
2.
3.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
Press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
selection.
PRES ET ADJUS T
RES ET:CH
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
CHECK AUTO
CH
:FL
MD:AUDYSSEY
CH:FL
63
125
250
500
1k
2k
4k
8k
16k
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
+9
0dB
+9
0dB
63 250 1k 4k 16kHz
125 500 2k 8k
63 250 1k 4k 16kHz
125 500 2k 8k
RETURN
EXIT
RETURN
EXIT
RESET:
Using the 1 or 2 cursor buttons, select the
channel(s) to be reset to either the currently
displayed channel (“CH”) or all channels (“ALL”),
and press the OK/ENTER button to enter the
setting.
“ALL”: Resets all channels.
“CH” : Resets only the currently displayed
channel.
Select MD (mode) with the 3 / 4 cursor buttons
followed by the desired equalizer (“AUDYSSEY”,
“FRONT”, “FLAT”).
CH:
Select the channel to check with the 1or 2cursor
buttons.
CH:
Notes:
Select the channel (“FL”, “C”, “FR”, “SR”, “SBR”,
“SBL” or “SL”) to adjust with the 1 or 2 cursor
buttons, and switch to the adjustment mode with
the 4cursor button.
• The frequency will not be exactly the same as in the
Preset G. EQ modes.
• FL and FR are not indicated on the CHECK AUTO
2 menu.
Frequency:
Select the target frequency on the graph with the
1 or 2 cursor buttons and press the OK/ENTER
button to enter the selection. Adjust the level with
the 3 or 4 cursor buttons. (Note that this can be
adjusted to any level between –20 and +9 dB in
0.5 dB increments.)
Once finished checking, select “RETURN” with
4.
the 3 / 4 cursor buttons and press the OK/
ENTER button to return to the “6. ACOUSTIC
EQ” menu.
Move to the next frequency with the 1or 2cursor
buttons, and adjust the level.
After you complete this portion of the setup, press the
OK/ENTER button to enter the settings. Move cursor
to “RETURN” with the 3, 4, 1and 2cursor buttons
and press the OK/ENTER button.
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SELECTING THE SURROUND MODE
Example: AUTO SURROUND
ADJUSTING THE MAIN VOLUME
ADJUSTING THE TONE (BASS & TREBLE)
CONTROL
BASIC OPERATION
(PLAY BACK)
READY
VOLUME
CH
VOL
M
SURROUND
M
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG
DIGITAL
IGITAL
D1
D4
GHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DOWN
UP
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
OK
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
MultEQ
MIC
Before you can listen to any input media, you must
first select the input source on the SR7001.
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
USE
PAGE
3
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
PREV
MUTE
USE
PAGE
1
2
3
4
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
Example : DVD
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
CH
INPUT SELECTOR
CH
.
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
SPK-AB
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
DSD
AUX1
AMP
INPUT SELECTOR
Adjust the volume to a comfortable level using
the VOLUME control knob on the front panel or
VOLUME 3/ 4buttons on the remote.
To increase the volume, turn the VOLUME knob
clockwise or press VOLUME 3button on the remote,
to decrease the volume, turn counterclockwise or
press VOLUME 4button on the remote.
LIGHT
7
8
9
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
MODE
MUL
SPEAK
1
2
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
AUTO
MULTI
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
DSD
7.1CH INPUT
CLEAR
MEMO
0
PURE DIRECT
THX
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
STANDBY
MENU
SURROUND
MODE
MUL
SPEA
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
AUTO
MULTI
TUNER
TAPE
7.1CH INPUT
PURE DIRECT
THX
AUX1
STANDBY
During a listening session you may wish to adjust the
Bass and Treble Control to suit your listening tastes
or room acoustics.
MENU
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
LIGHT
1
2
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
AUX1
AMP
LIGHT
1
2
Notes:
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
(Using the remote control unit)
To adjust the tone, press the AMP button and press
the > button PAGE3 is displayed.
To adjust the bass effect, press BASS+ (D2) or
BASS– (D3).
To adjust the treble effect, TREB+ (D4) or TREB–
(D5).
• The volume can be adjusted within the range of – ∞
To select DVD, turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob
on the front panel or press the DVD button on the
remote two times in a row. After you have selected
DVD, simply turn on the DVD player and play the
DVD.
to 18 dB, in steps of 1 dB.
(Using the SR7001)
To select the Auto surround mode during playback,
press the AUTO button on the front panel.
•
However, when the channel level is set as described on
page 33, if the volume for any channel is set at +1 dB
or greater, the volume cannot be adjusted up to 18 dB.
(In this case the maximum volume adjustment range
is “18 dB - Maximum value of channel level)
(Using the remote control unit)
• As the input source is changed, the new input
name will appear momentarily an OSD information
on the video display. The input name will also
appear in the display, on the front-panel.
To select the Auto surround mode, press the AMP
button and press the > button until PAGE1 is
displayed. Press the AUTO (D1) button.
• For surround modes, see “Surround Mode” on
page 42.
Notes:
• The tone control function is unavailable for the
Source Direct, Pure Direct, Dolby Headphone,
Dolby Virtual Speaker THX mode, and 192kHz
PCM.
NIGHT MODE
• If you use the FUNCTION RENAME feature (see
page 26) , the renamed name appears on the
display.
• To add the THX mode to the Auto Surround mode,
press either the THX button on the SR7001 or the
THX button on the remote control unit.
M
• The tone control function is not available when
PRESET G.EQ is being used.
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
• As the input is changed, the SR7001 will
automatically switch to the digital input, surround
mode, attenuation, and night mode status which
were entered during the configuration process for
that source.
• To select a specific surround mode, Press the
individual surround mode button on page 1.2 on
the remote control unit.
USE
PAGE
3
DIALOGUE NORMALIZATION MESSAGE
Dialogue Normalization (Dial Norm) is a feature of
Dolby Digital.
When playing back software which has been
encoded in Dolby Digital, sometimes you may see a
brief message on the FL display which will read "Dial
Norm X dB" (X being a numeric value).
Dialogue Normalization serves to let you know if the
source material has been recorded at a higher or
lower level than usual. For example, if you see the
following message: "Dial Norm + 4 dB" on the FL
display, to keep the overall output level constant just
turn down the volume control by 4 dB. In other words,
the source material that you are listening to has been
recorded 4 dB louder than usual.
• When an audio source is selected, the last video
input used remains routed to the VCR1 & DSS/
VCR2 Outputs and Monitor Output. This permits
simultaneous viewing and listening to different
sources.
CH
TUNER
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
TAPE
AUX1
AMP
LIGHT
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
• When a video source is selected, the selected
video signal is output from the MONITOR OUT
terminal.
(Using the remote control unit)
To adjust the tone, press the AMP button and press
the > button PAGE3 is displayed.
Press the NIGHT (D1) button to turn on the Night
mode. Setting the Night mode to “ON” compresses
the dynamic range in Dolby Digital only.
This softens loud passages such as sudden
explosions, to help prevent disturbing others late at
night. To turn off the Night mode, Press the NIGHT
(D1) button again.
If you do not see a message on the FL display, then
no adjustment of the volume control is necessary.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• When a monitor is connected to the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001
CONNECTION EXAMPLE
VIDEO CONVERT
TEMPORARILY TURNING OFF THE SOUND
• When a monitor is connected to the HDMI
MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
ANALOG VIDEO CONVERSION
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
DSD
DOWN
UP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
SPEAKERS
A/B
P
U
R
E
D
I
R
E
C
T
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
OK
READY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
The SR7001 is equipped to convert video signals
for monitor output. Because of this, indifferent of
the connection (VIDEO, S-VIDEO, COMPONENT
VIDEO) between the playback device and the
SR7001, listening and viewing are possible with a
single higher grade cable between the MONITOR
OUT terminal of the SR7001 and the monitor.
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
PURE DIRECT
DSD
DOWN
UP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
VIDEO
or S-VIDEO
or component
LIP.SYNC
PREV
MUTE
GUIDE
component
MENU
TEST
EXIT
VIDEO
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
or S-VIDEO
or component
or HDMI
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
HDMI
7
8
9
HDMI
UP-CONVERSION FROM ANALOG VIDEO
SIGNALS TO HDMI
To temporarily silence all speaker outputs such as
when interrupted by a phone call, press the MUTE
button on the remote.
This will interrupt the output to all speakers and the
head-phone jack, but it will not affect any recording
or dubbing that may be in progress.
When the system is muted, the display will show
“MUTE” .
Notes:
Notes:
• The HDMI video signal input from the playback
device is not output from the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001.
• If the resolution of the component video signal input
from the playback device is other than 480i/576i,
480p/576P, 1080i or 720p, images are not output
from the HDMI MONITOR OUT terminal of the
SR8001.
The up-conversion feature of the SR7001 can output
the input analog video signals (for component video
signals of 480i/576i, 480p/576P, 1080i and 720p
resolution, and S-Video and Video (composite)
of 480i/576i resolution) to the HDMI MONITOR
terminal.
Notes of OSD menu system:
• The setup menu can be displayed through all
video out terminals (“HDMI”, “COMPONENT”,
“SVIDEO” and “VIDEO”).
• If the resolution of the S-Video or Video signal input
from the playback device is other than 480i/576i,
images are not output from the HDMI MONITOR
OUT terminal of the SR7001.
Press the MUTE button again to return to normal
operation.
Notes:
• OSD information is output only to the VIDEO and
S-VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals.
• HDMI video input is only output to the HDMI
MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001. If
connecting a playback device such as a DVD
player to the HDMI input jack, connect the HDMI
MONITOR OUT terminal of the SR7001 to a TV
monitor.
• When a monitor is connected to the VIDEO or S-
VIDEO MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001
OSD information is also output when the video
conversion feature is on and the video signal input
to the VIDEO or S-VIDEO input jack of the SR7001
is converted and output from the COMPONENT
VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT terminals.
USING THE SLEEP TIMER
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
READY
PREV
MUTE
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
UT
A
UT
O
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SURROUND
DIGITAL
GUIDE
SLEEP
A
O
SURR
MT
X
6.
1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
A
AC
P
C
M
SL
SR
DSD
DOWN
UP
MENU
TEST
EXIT
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7
.
1
C
H
I
N
P
U
T
DISPLAY
CH.SEL
SURR
• This mode is unavailable for the REC out terminal.
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
• This mode is unavailable for still picture, fast
forward and reverse play on video component.
4
5
OSD
6
DISP
SLEEP
VIDEO
VIDEO
or S-VIDEO
I/P CONVERT
7
8
THX
9
•
If, while attempting to use the video convert feature,
the SR7001 cannot synchronize with the display
device, “NO SIGNAL” appears on the monitor or
noise is generated, this feature cannot be used. All of
these signs are caused by equipment incompatibility;
there is nothing wrong with the SR7001.
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the
“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”. Next,
connectthevideoinputsignaltothedisplaycomponent
via the MONITOR OUT terminal under VIDEO and
the S-video input signal to the display component via
the MONITOR OUT terminal under S-VIDEO.
CLEAR
MEMO
or S-VIDEO
0
The video circuit of the SR7001 is equipped with an
I/P conversion feature.
or component
When this feature is on, 480i/576i analog video
signals (VIDEO, S-VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO)
input from a playback device can be converted
to 480p/576p and progressively output to the
COMPONENT VIDEO or HDMI MONITOR OUT
terminals of the SR7001.
HDMI
To program the SR7001 for automatic standby, press
the SLEEP button on the remote.
Each press of the button will increase the time before
Notes:
• The HDMI video signal input from the playback
device is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001.
shut down in the following sequence.
(For setting instructions, see page 35)
• If the resolution of the component video signal input
from the playback device is other than 480i/576i,
it is not output from the VIDEO or S-VIDEO
MONITOR OUT terminals of the SR7001.
• The video convert feature constantly monitors
input video signals and determines whether to
convert the input signals or not. However, some
input video signals cannot be detected correctly.
If this occurs, set “VIDEO CONVERT” in the
“VIDEO SETUP” menu to “DISABLE”.
OFF
90
10
80
20
70
30
60
40
50
The sleep time will be shown for a few seconds in the
display on the front panel, and it will count down until
the time has elapsed.
When the programmed sleep time has elapsed, the
unit will automatically turn off.
•
For optimal video performance, THX recommends
setting the “VIDEO CONVERT” mode “DISABLE”.
Note that the SLEEP indicator on the display will
illuminate when the Sleep function is programmed.
To cancel the Sleep function, press the SLEEP
button until the display shows “SLEEP OFF” and the
SLEEP indicator will disappear.
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
• When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded
AUTO
2 MODE
SURROUND MODE
SURROUND
When this mode is selected, the SR7001/SR8001
determines whether the digital input signal is Dolby
Digital, Dolby Digital Surround EX, DTS, DTS-ES,
DTS 96/24 or PCM audio.
Surround EX & DTS-ES will operate for multichannel
sources that have a Dolby Digital Surround EX or
DTS-ES auto trigger flag in the digital signal.
When a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is input, the
number of channels for which the corresponding
signal is encoded will be played.
Inputting a Dolby Digital two channel signal with
Dolby surround status automatically subjects that
signal to Pro Logic IIx movie processing before play.
PCM 96 kHz source material can be played in this
mode.
(Dolby Digital, Pro Logic IIx MOVIE, Pro Logic II
MUSIC, Pro Logic IIx GAME)
This mode is used with source materials encoded in
Dolby Digital and Dolby Surround.
x
software in 6.1 channels, it is required to select the
THX Surround EX mode.
The SR7001/SR8001 is equipped with many
surround modes. These are provided to reproduce
a variety of surround sound effects, according to the
content of the source to be played.
The available surround modes may be restricted
depending on the input signal and speaker setup.
THX SELECT2 CINEMA
DOLBY DIGITAL
This mode is enabled when playing source materials
encoded in Dolby Digital.
Playing multichannel-encoded 5.1 channel Dolby
Digital sources provides 5 main audio channels (left,
center, right, surround left and surround right) and a
Low Frequency Effect channel.
Dolby Digital EX decoding is not available in this
mode.
THX SELECT2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using
all 7.1 speakers giving you the best possible movie
watching experience. In this mode, ASA processing
blends the surround L/R speakers and surround back
speakers, providing the optimal mix of ambient and
directional surround sound.
This mode permits the playback of a non Surround
EX/ES-encoded 5.1 movie over a 7.1 system.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby
Digital Surround EX-encoded soundtracks will be
automatically detected, if the appropriate flag has
been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks
are missing the digital flag that allows automatic
switching.
If you know that the movie that you are watching is
encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the
THX Surround EX playback mode, otherwise the THX
SELECT2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to
provide optimum replay.
SOURCE DIRECT
In the Source Direct mode, the tone control circuit
Acoustic EQ. and bass management configuration
are bypassed for full-range frequency response and
the purist audio reproduction.
Notes:
Dolby Pro Logic IIx has 5 modes:
Pro Logic IIx MOVIE
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround
sound from Dolby Surround, encoded stereo movie
soundtracks.
• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD
players, performing operations such as skip or stop
may momentarily interrupt the output.
Notes:
• Speaker size is set to Front L/R = LARGE, Center =
LARGE, Surround L/R = LARGE and Subwoofer
= YES automatically. Tone controls, equalizer and
additional processing are deactivated.
• When the signal is not decoded, the mode is changed
to AUTO mode automatically. See page 44 to
confirm the available decoding modes.
Pro Logic IIx MUSIC
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround
sound from conventional stereo sources (analog or
digital), such as CD, tape, FM, TV, stereo VCR, etc.
Pro Logic IIx GAME
• When you use this mode with certain DVD and CD
players, performing operations such as skip or stop
may momentarily interrupt the output.
THX CINEMA
THX Cinema mode applies additional processing
to Dolby Digital, DTS and Dolby Pro Logic multi-
channel, surround sources. The THX processing
was developed by Lucasfilm Ltd. to recreate the
sound of top-quality theater.
Use the THX Cinema mode for all movies on disc,
tape or broadcast. In this mode, the THX Surround
EX mode is not available.
This mode restores the impact low-frequency
surround effects by routing them to the system’s
subwoofer.
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Movie
This mode provides 7.1 channel surround sound from
PURE DIRECT
THX MUSIC
For the replay of multichannel music, the THX Music
mode should be selected. In this mode, THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround channels of all
5.1-encoded music sources, such as DTS and Dolby
Digital, to provide a wide, stable, rear soundstage.
This mode is to be used with multichannel music
sources such as DTS 5.1 music and Dolby Digital
5.1 music.
The Pure Direct mode further reduces sources of
noise in addition to effect of the Source Direct mode,
by blocking output from the video jacks (VIDEO,
S-VIDEO, COMPONENT VIDEO and HDMI) and
turning the FL display off.
5.1 channel sources movie soundtracks
.
5.1ch + Pro Logic IIx Music
This mode provides 6.1 or 7.1 channel surround sound
from 5.1 channel sources music soundtracks.
THX SURROUND EX
Notes:
• Pro Logic IIx mode will decode as Pro Logic II
mode when the SURR. B is set to “NONE” from
SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See page 31)
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology
are able to reproduce an extra channel which has
been added during the mixing of the program.
This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds
behind the listener in addition to the currently
available front left, front center, front right, surround
right, surround left and subwoofer channels.
This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and
brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before.
Notes:
• These modes are only available when you have
setup SPEAKER SIZE menu system (i.e. 2 surround
back speakers).
• Pro Logic IIx mode is available for a 2 channel input
signal which is encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD or
PCM format.
• These modes are only available when the input
signal has surround left and surround right contents.
• PCM audio signals can be subjected to Pro Logic IIx
processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
THX GAMES
For the replay of stereo and multichannel game
audio the THX Games mode should be selected.
In this mode, THX ASA processing is applied to
the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0-encoded
game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and
Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio
surround information, providing a full 360-degree
playback environment. THX Games mode is unique
as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all
points of the surround field.
THX Surround EX will operate for any 5.1 channel
source whenever THX is active.
THX Surround EX is not available in system without
surround back speaker(s).
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music
Note for HDCD
EX/ES
STEREO
•
HDCD is effective only through digital input.
This mode decodes 2 channel signals into 6 channel
signals using high-accuracy digital matrix technology.
The DTS Neo:6 decoder has near-discrete properties
in the frequency characteristics of the channels as
well as in channel separation.
According to the signals to be played back, DTS Neo:6
uses either the Neo:6 Cinema mode optimized for
movie playback or the Neo:6 Music mode optimized
for music playback.
This mode provides 6.1 channel surround for Dolby
Digital EX, and DTS-ES-encoded source material
such as DVD.
This mode cannot be used when an analog input has
been selected.
This mode bypasses all surround processing.
In stereo program sources, the left and right channels
play normally when PCM audio or analog stereo is
input.
With Dolby Digital and DTS sources, the 5.1 channels
are converted to two channel stereo. 96 kHz PCM
source material can be played back in stereo mode.
•
You may not be able to play some HDCD source
signals from certain CD players if you connect
the player to the SR7001/SR8001 digitally. This
is because the digital signal has been processed
(such as the output level, sampling frequency or
frequency response) and the SR7001/SR8001
cannot recognize the signal as HDCD data.
Dolby Digital EX
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology
are able to reproduce an extra channel which has
been added during the mixing of the program.
This channel, called surround back, places sounds
behind the listener in addition to the currently
available front left, front center, front right, surround
right, surround left and subwoofer channels.
This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and
brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound
localization than ever before.
CAUTION
Notes:
•
The Neo:6 mode is available for 2 channel input
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD
or PCM format.
Note for DTS
•
To connected DVD player, laserdisc player or CD
player needs to support DTS digital output. You
may not be able to play some DTS source signals
from certain CD players and LD players even if
you connect the player to the SR7001/SR8001
digitally. This is because the digital signal has been
processed (such as the output level, sampling
frequency or frequency response), and the SR7001/
SR8001 cannot recognize the signal as DTS data.
• PCM audio signals can be subjected to Neo:6
processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
MULTI CH. ST
This mode is used to create a wider, deeper and more
natural soundstage from two channel source material.
This is done by feeding the left channel signal to
both the left front and left surround speakers and the
right channel signal to both the right front and right
surround speakers. Additionally, the center channel
reproduces a mix of the right and left channels.
Dolby Digital EX is not available in systems that do
not have without surround back speaker(s).
• Depending on the player used, DTS play may
produce a short noise. This is not a malfunction.
DTS-ES (Discrete 6.1, Matrix 6.1)
• While signals from a DTS laserdisc or CD are
playing in another surround mode, you cannot
switch to digital input or from digital input to analog
input from the INPUT SETUP in the MAIN MENU
or by pressing the A/D button.
DTS-ES adds the surround center channel audio to
the DTS 5.1 channel format to improve the acoustic
positioning, and makes acoustic image movement
more natural with the 6.1 channel reproduction.
The SR7001/SR8001 incorporates a DTS-ES-
decoder, which can handle DTS-ES Discrete-
encoded and DTS-ES Matrix-encoded program
sources from DVD, etc.
DTS-ES Discrete 6.1 features digital discrete
recording of all channels, including the surround back
channel(s), and higher quality audio reproduction.
DTS-ES is not available in systems that do not have
surround back speakers.
CIRCLE SURROUND II
(CSII-CINEMA, CSII-MUSIC, CSII-MONO)
• You can not listen to DTS-encoded software in a
multiroom.
•
The outputs for VCR 1 OUT, DSS/VCR 2 OUT,
TAPE OUT and CD-R OUT output analog audio
signals only. Do not record from CDs or LDs that
support DTS using these outputs. If you do, the
DTS-encoded signal will be recorded as noise.
Circle Surround is designed to enable multichannel
surround sound playback of non-encoded and
multichannel encoded material.
Backward compatibility provides listeners with up to
6.1 channels of surround performance from an entire
collection of music and film, including broadcast,
videotape and stereo recorded music.
Depending on source material, you can select CSII-
Cinema mode, CSII-Music mode or CSII-Mono
mode.
Note or Dolby Digital Surround EX
•
When playing Dolby Digital Surround EX-encoded
software in 6.1 channels, it is required to set the
EX/ES mode.
dts
• NotethatsomeDolbyDigitalSurroundEX-encoded
software does not contain the identification signal.
In this case, set the EX/ES mode manually.
dts, Neo:6 Cinema, Neo:6 Music
Notes:
This mode is for DTS-encoded source materials
such as laserdisc, CD and DVD. Neo:6 is for some 2
channel sources.
• The CS II mode is available for 2 channel input
signals which are encoded in Dolby Digital, HDCD
or PCM format.
Note for 96 kHz/192 kHz PCM audio
•
The AUTO, Pure Direct, and Stereo modes can be
used when playing PCM signals with a sampling
frequency of 96/192 kHz (such as from DVD-Video/
Audio discs).
dts
• PCM audio signals can be subjected to CS II
processing when the sampling frequency is 32 kHz,
44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.
This mode is enabled when playing source materials
encoded in dts multichannel.
Playing multichannel encoded-5.1 channel dts
sources provides five main audio channels (left,
center, right, surround left and surround right) and a
Low Frequency Effects channel.
dts-ES decoding is not available in this mode.
The DTS mode cannot be used when an analog
input has been selected.
•
•
Certain DVD player models inhibit digital output. For
details, refer to the player’s operation manual.
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Some DVD discs feature copy protection. When using
such disc, 96 kHz PCM signal are not output from the
DVD player. For details, refer to the player’s operation
manual.
Dolby Virtual Speaker technology uses proprietary
technology of Dolby Laboratories to create a virtual
surround sound field using only two speakers for the
front channels, allowing the user to experience sound
as if surround speakers were actually being used.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Output Channel
SL SBL
SR SBR
Front information display
Channel status
The relationship between the selected surround
mode and the input signal
Surround Mode
AUTO
Input Signal
Decoding
L/R
C
SubW Signal format indicators
The surround mode is selected with the surround
mode selector on the SR7001 or the remote control
unit. However, the sound you hear is subject to the
relationship between the selected surround mode
and the input signal. That relationship is as follows:
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital 5.1
Dolby Digital 2.0
Pro Logic IIx movie
DTS-ES
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
dts 96/24
dts
M-PCM
M-PCM
SA-CD
SA-CD
PCM
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
ANALOG
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
dts 96/24
dts
M-PCM
M-PCM
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
L, R
L, R, S
L, R
L, R
L, R
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24
DTS-96/24
DTS 5.1
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
PCM 96kHz
HDCD
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
Multi Ch-PCM
PCM (Stereo)
PCM (Stereo)
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)
HDCD
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Analog
7.1ch input
Stereo
Multi Ch
-
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
SOURCE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital 5.1
Dolby Digital 2.0
Pro Logic IIx movie
DTS-ES
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24
DTS-96/24
DTS 5.1
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
PCM 96kHz
HDCD
Analog
7.1ch input
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
DTS-ES
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Stereo)
PCM (Stereo 96kHz)
HDCD
Stereo
Multi Ch
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX
DTS-ES
SA-CD
SA-CD
PCM
PCM
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
ANALOG
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
EX/ES
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
dts, ES
dts
M-PCM
SA-CD
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
M-PCM
SA-CD
SA-CD
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
dts, ES
dts 96/24
dts
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
SA-CD
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
SA-CD
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
dts 96/24
dts
M-PCM
M-PCM
SA-CD
SA-CD
PCM
PCM
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi-PCM
DTS-ES
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX
Multi Ch-PCM + Dolby EX
Dolby Digital 5.1
Dolby Digital 5.1
Dolby Digital 5.1 + PLIIx
Pro Logic IIx
Pro Logic IIx
Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx
Multi Ch-PCM + PLIIx
Pro Logic IIx
Pro Logic IIx
Pro Logic IIx
Pro Logic IIx
DTS 5.1
SA-CD (5.1ch)
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
Multi Ch-PCM
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
HDCD
Analog
DTS-ES
DTS 96/24
DTS (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM(Audio)
HDCD
DOLBY
-
(PLIIx movie)
(PLIIx music)
(PLIIx game)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
DTS
(Neo:6 Cinema)
(Neo:6 Music)
DTS-96/24
DTS 5.1
Neo:6
Neo:6
Neo:6
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
Neo:6
Neo:6
Analog
Neo:6
CSII
CSII Cinema
CSII Music
CSII Mono
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM(Audio)
HDCD
CSII
CSII
CSII
CSII
Analog
CSII
Stereo
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
STEREO
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
Stereo
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24
-
-
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
PCM 96kHz
HDCD
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
Analog
-
-
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Output Channel
SL SBL
Front information display
Channel status
Notes:
Surround Mode
Input Signal
Decoding
L/R
C
SubW Signal format indicators
• Dolby Digital (2 channel L/R): Speakers for signal
with Dolby Surround are fully equipped.
SR SBR
-
Dolby Virtual
Speaker
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Virtual Speaker
Dolby Digital EX
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
-
-
• No sound is outputs from the surround speaker,
center speaker and subwoofer if the DVD disc has
no surround data.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24
-
-
-
-
dts 96/24
dts
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
HDCD
-
-
-
-
-
-
M-PCM
SA-CD
-
-
-
-
-
-
SA-CD
PCM
Abbreviations
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
L/R : Front speakers
C : Center speaker
Analog
-
-
-
Multi Ch.
Stereo
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
-
-
-
-
-
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
dts 96/24
dts
M-PCM
M-PCM
SA-CD
SA-CD
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
Dolby Digital 5.1
SL/SR : Surround speakers
SBL/SBR : Surround back speakers
SubW : Subwoofer
Multi Channel Stereo
Multi Channel Stereo
DTS-ES
DTS-96/24
DTS 5.1
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Channel Stereo
Multi Channel Stereo
Multi Channel Stereo
Multi Channel Stereo
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby H.P
Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX 5.1
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
DTS-ES + THX
DTS 96/24
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
Multi Ch-PCM 96kHz
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
HDCD
L, R
L, R
Analog
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, R
L, R, S
L, C, R, SL, SR, S, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
L, C, R, SL, SR, LFE
Dolby H.P
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
DTS 96/24
-
-
-
-
dts 96/24
dts
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
HDCD
-
-
-
-
-
-
M-PCM
SA-CD
-
-
-
-
-
-
SA-CD
PCM
-
-
-
-
-
-
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
Analog
-
-
THX
(THX Games)
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
HDCD
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
dts
M-PCM
SA-CD
SA-CD
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
2 DIGITAL EX
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL
2 DIGITAL 2 SURROUND
dts, ES
dts
M-PCM
SA-CD
SA-CD
DTS + THX 5.1
Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1
Multi Ch-PCM + THX5.1
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Dolby Digital + THX Surround EX
Dolby Digital 5.1+ THX Select2 Cinema
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
DTS-ES + THX
DTS + THX Select2 Cinema
Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema
Multi Ch-PCM + THX Select2 Cinema
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
Pro Logic IIx movie + THX
-
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Analog
THX Select2
(THX EX)
(THX Music)
(THX Games)
Dolby Surr.EX
Dolby D (5.1ch)
Dolby D (2ch)
Dolby D (2ch Surr)
DTS-ES
DTS (5.1ch)
Multi Ch-PCM
SA-CD (5.1ch)
SA-CD (2ch)
PCM (Audio)
HDCD
L, R
L, R
L, R
-
PCM
PCM, HDCD
ANALOG
Analog
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ATTENUATION TO ANALOG INPUT SIGNAL
DOLBY HEADPHONE MODE
VIDEO ON/OFF
OTHER FUNCTION
TV AUTO ON/OFF FUNCTION
This feature simulates the waveforms of the actual
sounds heard from the speakers.
When headphones are used, the MENU button
automatically switches to the Dolby headphone
mode.
When no video signal is connected to the SR7001
or a DVD, etc., is connected directly to your TV,
the unnecessary video circuit can be turned off by
selecting the “VIDEO OFF” setting.
To select video off, press the AMP button and press
the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the
V-OFF button.
LIP.SYNC
PREV
MUTE
GUIDE
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
This function allows the component connected to the
TV-VIDEO in jack to control the power (ON/OFF) to
the SR7001.
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
The OSD that appears when the MENU button is
pressed is shown below.
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
0
HEAD PHONE
M
AUTO POWER ON
D1
UND RECEIVER SR8001
DOLBY HP MODE : DH
D2
D3
SURROUND
: PLII
CINEMA
Be sure the TV auto mode is ENABLED. (Refer
to page 35: PREFERENCE)
If the selected analog audio input signal is greater
than the capable level of internal processing, the
“PEAK” indicator will light up on the front display. If
this happens, you should press the ATT button on
the remote.
“ATT” indicator will be illuminated when this function
is activated. The signal-input level is reduced by
about half. Attenuation will not work with the output
signal of TAPE-OUT, CD/CD-R, VCR1-OUT and
DSS/VCR2-OUT.
1.
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
D5
L LEVEL
R LEVEL
: +10dB
0dB
USE
PAGE
4
Connect your TV TUNER (etc) to the TV-
VIDEO in terminal. Be sure to connect the
VIDEO input.
:
2.
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
ONES
CH
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
Turn OFF the power to the TV TUNER and the
SR7001.
3.
AUX1
AMP
LIGHT
DOLBY HP (Headphone) MODE can be selected
with the left and right cursor buttons.
BYPASS → DH (DOLBY Headphone) → BYPASS
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
TurnONtheTVTUNERandtuneinareceivable
station.
4.
This function is memorized for each individual input
source.
When the station is received, the SR7001 turns
ON and TV is selected automatically.
5.
BYPASS: Bypasses the Dolby headphone mode
and delivers ordinary 2-channel stereo.
DH: Dolby Headphone is a signal processing
system that delivers a sound similar to
room speakers.
AUTO POWER OFF
LISTENING THROUGH HEADPHONES
In the above situation, turn the TV TUNER OFF
or select a channel that does not contain any
broadcast.
1.
This jack may be used to listen to the SR7001’s
output through a pair of headphones. Be certain that
the headphones have a standard 1/4” stereo phono
plug. (Note that the speakers will automatically be
turned off when the headphone jack is in use.)
It makes it possible to experience
the volume and space of a 5-channel
surround system using ordinary stereo
headphones.
ThepowertotheSR7001switchestoSTANDBY
after approx. 5 minutes.
2.
When the PURE DIRECT mode is selected, Dolby
surround processing is bypassed and “✽✽✽” is
displayed as the mode indication.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
Notes:
INPUT SELECTOR
• AUTO POWER OFF is canceled if the SR7001 is
set to a source other than TV.
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SP
DISC 6.1
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
DSD
The surround mode can be selected when the
modes in DH is selected.
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
The function reactivates when TV is selected again.
AUTO
MULTI
7.1CH INPUT
PURE DIRECT
THX
L/R LEVEL can be set in the 12 dB range.
• Some TV broadcasts may cause the TV AUTO
FUNCTION to turn ON.
STANDBY
MENU
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
Notes:
• The S-Video terminal does not support “TV AUTO
ON/OFF” function.
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as
soon as the plug is removed from the jack.
• TONE cannot be set when the mode in DH is
selected.
Note:
• The surround mode returns to the previous setting as
soon as the plug is removed from the jack.
• The Dolby Headphone function will not work when
32 or 96 kHz PCM digital signals are input.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recording the video from one source and
the audio from another
You can add the sound from one source to the
video of another source to make your own video
recordings.
Below is an example of recording the sound from
a compact disc player connected to CD IN and the
video from a video camera connected to VCR1 to
video cassette recorder connected to the DSS/VCR2
OUT jack.
DISPLAY MODE
SELECTING ANALOG AUDIO INPUT OR
DIGITAL AUDIO INPUT
RECORDING AN ANALOG SOURCE
In normal operation, the audio or video source
selected for listening through the SR7001 is sent to
the record outputs.
This means that any program you are watching
or listening to may be recorded simply by placing
machines connected to the outputs for TAPE OUT,
CD/CDR OUT, VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT in
the record mode.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
M
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
D1
D2
D4
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
MENU
TEST
EXIT
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
CH.SEL
SURR
DSD
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
S
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
ENTER
7
8
THX
9
MENU
EXIT
USE
PAGE
4
PHONES
D5
CLEAR
MEMO
0
CH
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
To record the input source signal you are currently
watching or listening to
AUX1
AMP
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
LIGHT
You can select the display mode for the front display
of the SR7001.
To select this mode, press the DISPLAY on the
remote control or the front panel.
When this button is pressed, the display mode is
switched in the following sequence.
Input Mode → Surround Mode → Auto display OFF
→ Display OFF → Normal Mode → Input Mode
2.
1.
1
2
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
TUNER
TAPE
1.
AUX1
LIGHT
1
2
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
RC8001SR
INPUT SELECTOR
Learning Remote Controller
If you have already assigned the digital inputs, you
can temporarily select the audio input mode for each
input source as following procedures.
Press the AMP button and press the > button until
PAGE4 is displayed. Press the A/D (D3) button.
When this button is pressed, the input mode is
switched in the following sequence.
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
DSD
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
AMP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKE
AUTO
MULTI
Switch the video output source to VCR1 by
simply pressing the input selector buttons on
the remote.
1.
2.
3.
7.1CH INPUT
TUNER
TAPE
1.
PURE DIRECT
THX
STANDBY
MENU
AUX1
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
LIGHT
1
2
RC8001SR
Normal Mode:
Learning Remote Controller
Switch the audio input source to CD by simply
pressing the input selector buttons on the
remote.
Displays the selected input function. If the function
has been renamed using the Function Rename
feature (see page 26), the renamed name appears
on the display.
Auto → HDMI → Digital → Analog → Auto
Auto mode:
Select the input source to record by turning the
INPUT FUNCTION SELECTOR knob on the
front panel or simply press the input selector
buttons on the remote.
1.
The types of signals being input to the digital and
analog input jacks for the selected input source are
detected automatically.
If no digital signal is being input, the analog input
jacks are selected automatically.
HDMI mode:
HDMI mode can be selected only when an HDMI
input has been assigned as an input source.
When “HDMIAUDIO” under PREFERENCE of the
SETUP MENU is set to “THROUGH”, the HDMI
mode cannot be selected.
Now “CD” has been selected as the audio input
source and “VCR1” as the video input source.
Input Mode:
Displays the input mode set via the Function Input
Setup feature (see page 25).
Notes:
• If you change the input source during recording, you
The input source is now selected and you may
watch or listen to it as desired.
Surround Mode:
Displays the status of the selected surround
mode.
will record the signals from the newly selected input
source.
The currently selected input source signal
is output to the TAPE OUT, CD/CDR OUT,
VCR1 OUT, and DSS/VCR2 OUT outputs for
recording.
2.
3.
• You cannot record the surround effects.
Auto Display Off mode:
• Digital input signals are only output to the digital
outputs. There is no conversion from digital to
analog .
The display is off. But, if you make a change to
the unit such as the input or surround mode, the
display will show that change, then go back to
off after about 3 seconds. When changing the
volume, it is not displayed.
Digital mode:
Start recording to the recording component as
desired.
When connecting CD players and other digital
components, do not connect only the digital
terminals, but the analog ones as well.
The input signal is fixed to an assigned digital input
terminal.
Analog mode:
Display Off mode:
The display is off completely.
The analog input jacks are selected.
Note:
This selection is temporary and will not be stored in
memory.
To store changes to the input mode, select “1. INPUT
SETUP” from the MAIN MENU. (See page 25)
• Only the DISP indicator will be illuminated on the
front display in display off condition.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
To cancel the 7.1 CH. INPUT setting, press the 7.1
CH INPUT button on the front panel or press 7.1 CH
on the remote.
SPEAKER A/B
LIP.SYNC
1.
2.
Depending on the image device (TV, monitor,
projector, etc.) connected to the SR7001, a time lag
can occur between image signal processing and
audio signal processing. Though minor, this time
lag can interfere with movie and music enjoyment.
The LIP.SYNC feature delays the audio signal with
respect to the image signal output from the SR7001
to correct the time lag between the sound and image.
It can be operated with the “LIP.SYNC” and 1 and
2 cursor buttons of the remote controller. Set the
remote controller to the AMP mode before operating
the LIP.SYNC feature. The initial setting is OFF (0
ms).The time lag can be adjusted in 10 ms steps up
to 200 ms.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
VOLUME
INPUT SELECTOR
Notes:
PREV
MUTE
SURROUND
DIGITAL
ULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
MENU
TEST
EXIT
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
L
C
LFE
S
R
• When the 7.1 CH. Input is in use, you may not select
a surround mode, as the external decoder determines
processing.
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
CH.SEL
SURR
DSD
DOWN
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
MULTI
SPEAKER
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
AUTO
MULTI
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
7.1CH INPUT
SPEAKERS
A/B
CH
VOL
MultEQ
MIC
PURE DIRECT
THX
ENTER
STANDBY
7
8
THX
9
E
• In addition, there is no signal at the record outputs
when the 7.1 CH. Input is in use.
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
MENU
DIGITAL
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
4.
4.
CLEAR
MEMO
0
OK
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
AUX2 INPUT
SR7001 has speaker system - A and speaker
system- B for front L/R channels.
You can select these systems by pressing
SPEAKERS A/B button on the front panel or SPK-
AB on the remote.
4.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
If you don’t need to connect 7.1 Ch. input terminals
with multi channel decoder,
L(front left) and R (front right) inputs terminals are
available as AUX2 input.
In this case, You can connect additional audio source
to AUX2 as other audio input terminals.
3.
2.
READY
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
VOLUME
7
8
THX
9
SURROUND
DIGITAL
Watch the picture on the image device (i.e., TV,
monitor, projector, etc.) as you adjust the time lag.
L
C
LFE
S
R
M
SL
SR
DOWN
UP
CLEAR
MEMO
0
ODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
Note:
SPEAKERS
A/B
MultEQ
MIC
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
• The LIP.SYSNC feature turns OFF (0 ms) in
the SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode. When the
SOURCE/PURE DIRECT mode is deactivated, the
set value of the LIP.SYSNC feature is automatically
restored.
7.1 CH INPUT
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
INPUT SELECTOR
The SR7001 is equipped for future expansion
through the use of Multi channel Super Audio CD
multichannel player or DVD-Audio player.
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI AUTO
AUTO SURR
SLEEP
DSD
SURROUND
MODE
AUTO
MULTI
Select a desired Video source to decide the
routed video signal to the Monitor Outputs.
7.1CH
I
1.
2.
When this is selected, the input signals connected to
the L(front left), R (front right), CENTER, SL(surround
left), SR (surround right) and SBL(surround back left)
and SBR (surround back right) channels of the 7.1
CH. In jacks are output directly to the front (left and
right), center, surround (left and right) and surround
back speaker systems as well as the pre-out jacks
without passing through the surround circuitry.
In addition, the signal input to the SW (subwoofer)
jack is output to the PRE OUT SW (subwoofer) jack.
When 7.1 CH. INPUT is selected, the last video input
used remains routed to the Monitor Outputs.
This permits simultaneous viewing with video
sources
PURE DIRECT
THX
STANDBY
MEN
CH
VOL
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
Press the 7.1 CH INPUT button on the front
panel or press 7.1 CH on the remote to switch
the 7.1 channel input.
OK
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
If it is necessary to adjust the output level of
each channel, press the CH.SEL button on the
remote.
3.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
Adjust the speaker output levels so that you can
hear the same sound level from each speaker
at the listening position. For the front left, front
right, center, surround left, surround right and
surround back speakers, the output levels can
be adjusted between –12 to +12 dB.
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
0
The subwoofer can be adjusted between –18
and +12 dB.
These adjustments result will be stored to 7.1
CH. INPUT memory.
AdjustthemainvolumewiththeMAINVOLUME
knob or the VOL buttons on the remote.
4.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Using the SR7001)
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice
within two seconds on the remote.
1.
M
5.
BASIC OPERATION
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select
“TUNER”.
1.
2.
3.
3. 2.
Press the > button until PAGE 1 isdisplayed.
(TUNER)
2.
3.
5.
4.
Press the BAND button to select either FM or
AM.
Press the BAND (D5) button to select either
FM or AM.
To operate the unit from the remote control, press
the TUNER button on the remote control so that the
tuner mode is engaged.
USE
PAGE
2
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front
Panel for more than 1 second to start the auto
tuning function.
AAC
PCM
Press the GUIDE on the remote, display will
show “FREQ----”.
SL
SR
DSD
4.
5.
6.
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
TUNER
TAPE
CD
MD
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
lnput your desired station’s, frequency with the
ten numbered keypad on the remote.
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
LISTENING TO THE TUNER
AUX1
AMP
Automatic searching begins then stops when a
station is tuned in.
1.
4.
LIGHT
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
Frequency scan step for AM is selectable.
The desired station will automatically be tuned.
Default setup is 10 kHz step, if your country’s
standard is 9 kHz step, Press BAND button on the
front panel or TUNER button on the remote more
than 5 seconds. Scan step will change.
(Using the remote control unit)
(FM) TUNING MODE (AUTO STEREO OR MONO)
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice
within two second on the remote.
M
1.
(Using the SR7001)
D1
D2
D3
D4
Note:
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select
“TUNER”.
1.
2.
3.
Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.
2.
3.
•
Preset memory for the tuner will clear by changing
this setup.
Press the BAND (D5) button to select either
FM or AM.
Press the BAND button to select either FM or
AM.
USE
PAGE
1
D5
R
VOLUME
SURROUND
DIGITAL
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.
AUTO TUNING
6.
1
NIGHT
EQ
4.
5.
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on the front
Panel to select the desired station.
SL
SR
CH
VOL
DOWN
UP
Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN– (D2)
button for 1 second or more.
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
M
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
TUNER
TAPE
MultEQ
MIC
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
R
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
Automatic searching begins then stops when a
station is tuned in.
AUX1
(Using the remote control unit)
6.
LIGHT
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
To select tuner, press the TUNER button twice
within two seconds on the remote.
1.
1.
3.
USE
PAGE
2
If tuning does not stop at the desired station, use to
the “Manualtunin” operation.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.
INPUT SELECTOR
2.
3.
CH
VOL
2.
When in the auto stereo mode, AUTO indicator will
be illuminated on the display.
The “ST” indicator is illuminated when a stereo
broadcast is tuned in.
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
SLEEP
S
Press the BAND (D5) button to select either
FM or AM.
DSD
MANUAL TUNING
SURROUND
MODE
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
AUTO
MU
Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.
TUNER
TAPE
CD
D2
D3
4.
5.
PURE DIRECT
THX
STANDBY
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
AUX1
At open frequencies, the noise is muted and the
“TUNED” and “ST” indicators are not illuminated.
If the signal is weak, it may be difficult to tune into the
station in stereo. In such a case, Press the MODE
button on the front panel. Or press the TUNER button
and press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.
Press the T-MODE (D4) button.
“AUTO” indicator is not illuminated, if FM stereo
broadcasts are received in monaural and the “ST”
indicator is not illuminated.
Press the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN
to tune in the deseired station.
–
(D2) button
1.
LIGHT
D4
1
2
3.
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
USE
PAGE
2
1.
5
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
DIRECT FREQUENCY CALL
INPUT SELECTOR
CH
VOL
2.
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
SLEEP
S
LIP.SYNC
PREV
MUTE
DSD
GUIDE
M
SOURCE
5.
4.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
SURROUND
MODE
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
AUTO
MU
CH.SEL
SURR
D1
D
D3
D4
D5
M
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
TUNER
TAPE
PURE DIRECT
THX
D1
D2
D3
STANDBY
3. 2.
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
AUX1
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
5.
SLEEP
1.
5.
4.
LIGHT
7
8
THX
9
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
To return to auto stereo mode, Press the MODE
button or Press T-MODE button on the remote again.
AUTO indicator is illuminated the display.
USE
PAGE
2
CLEAR
MEMO
0
D4
3.
PURE DIRECT
URROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
USE
PAGE
2
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
CH
VOL
2.
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
TUNER
TAPE
TUNER
TAPE
MD
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX1
AMP
AUX1
AMP
1.
1.
LIGHT
LIGHT
1
2
OK
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MANUAL PRESET MEMORY
RECALLING A PRESET STATION
PRESET SCAN
PRESET MEMORY
CH
VOL
M
CH
VOL
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
With this unit you can preset up to 60 FM/AM stations
in any order.
For each station, you can memorize the frequency
and reception mode if desired.
D1
D2
D3
4
D5
3.
2. 4.
TUNER
TAPE
4.
AUX1
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
OK
OK
PREV
MUTE
1.
2.
2.
5.
2.
LIGHT
1
2
MENU
TEST
EXIT
RC8001SR
CH.SEL
SURR
Learning Remote Controller
DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
LIP.SYNC
USE
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
PAGE
2
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
L
C
LFE
S
R
PREV
MUTE
AAC
PCM
PREV
MUTE
SL
SR
SD
DO
4
5
OSD
6
3.
2.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
AUTO PRESET MEMORY
DISP
SLEEP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
CH.SEL
SURR
(Using the SR7001)
7
8
THX
9
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
This function automatically scans the FM and AM
band and enters all stations with proper signal
strength into the memory.
CLEAR
MEMO
ENTER
0
MENU
EXIT
DIG
Select the desired preset station by pressing
the 1or 2cursor buttons on the front panel.
1.
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
4
5
OSD
6
DISP
SLEEP
AUX1
AMP
7
8
THX
9
1.
5.
LIGHT
1
2
CLEAR
MEMO
0
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
(Using the remote control unit)
2. 4. 1. 3. 2. 5.
(Using the SR7001)
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
P
ress the TUNER button twice within two
1.
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
(Using the remote control unit)
Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to
the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”
section).
seconds on the remote.
1.
2.
3.
4.
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
Press the > button until PAGE4 is displayed
DOWN
UP
2.
3.
Press the TUNER button twice within two
1.
2.
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
seconds on the remote.
Press the P-SET+ (D4) or P-SET– (D5) button
to tune in the deseired preset station.
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.
“– –“ (preset number) starts blinking on the
display.
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
Press the > button until PAGE2 is displayed
and press the P-SCAN (D4) on the remote.
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
Or enter the preset station number with the
numeric buttons.
“PRESET SCAN” appears on the front display
and then the preset station with the lowest
preset number is recalled first.
Select the preset number by pressing the 1
or 2 cursor buttons, while this is still blinking
(approx. 5 seconds)
To select FM , press the BAND button on the
1.
2.
Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1
front panel.
3.
Press the MEMORY button again to enter. The
display stops blinking.
→ No.2 → etc.) for 5 seconds each.
While pressing the MEMORY button, press the
1cursor button.
No stored preset number will be skipped.
The station is now stored in the specified preset
memory location.
You can fast forward the preset stations, press
the > button until PAGE4 is displayed and
press the P-SET+ (D4) continuously.
“AUTO PRESET” will appear on the display,
and scanning starts from the lowest frequency.
4.
5.
(Using the remote control unit)
Each time the tuner finds a station, scanning
will pause and the station will be played for five
seconds.
3.
When the desired preset station is received,
cancel the preset scan operation by pressing
the CLEAR button or P-SCAN (D4) on the
remote.
Tune into the radio station you desire (Refer to
the “MANUAL TUNING” or “AUTO TUNING”
1.
During this time, the following operations are
possible.
section).
Press the MEMO button on the remote. “– –“
(preset number) starts blinking on the display.
2.
The band can be changed by the BAND button.
If no button is pressed during this period, the
current station is memorized in location Preset
02.
Enter the desired preset number by pressing
the numeric buttons.
4.
5.
3.
Note:
If you wish to skip the current station, press the
3 cursor button during this period, this station
is skipped and auto presetting continues.
• When entering a single digit number (2 for example),
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few
seconds.
Operation stops automatically when all 50
preset memory positions are filled or when auto
scanning attains the highest end of all bands.
If you desire to stop the auto preset memory at
anytime, press the CLEAR button.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS
SORTING PRESET STATIONS
NAME INPUT OF THE PRESET STATION.
After selecting the first character to be entered,
press the MEMORY or ENTER button, or press
the MEMO button on the remote.
5.
You can remove preset stations from the memory
using the following procedure.
This function allows the name of each preset channel
to be entered using alphanumeric characters.
Before name inputting, you need to store preset
stations with the preset memory operation.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
The entry in this column is fixed and the next
column starts to flash. Fill the next column the
same way.
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
DOWN
UP
2. 3.
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
TEST
CH.SEL
SURR
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
4.
5. 2. 5. 6.
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
VOLUM
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
Tomovebackandforthbetweenthecharacters,
press the 1/ 2cursor buttons or press CH+ or
CH– button on the remote.
SURROUND
DIGITAL
D
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
7
8
THX
9
READY
AAC
PCM
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
SL
SR
DOWN
3.
2.
CLEAR
MEMO
0
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
LTI
AKER
L
C
LFE
S
R
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
DOWN
UP
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
Note:
MultEQ
MIC
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
ENTER
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
IN
DIGITAL
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
• Unused columns should be filled by entering
blanks.
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
TV
DVD
VCR
DSS
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
If you have stations memorized, and there is a gap in
the sequential order:
I.e. the stations are stored as follows
1) 87.1 MHz
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
To save the name, press the MEMORY or
ENTER button on the front panel, or press the
MEMO button on the remote for more than 2
seconds.
6.
Recall the preset number to be cleared with
the method described in “Recalling” a preset
station.
1.
VOL
2) 93.1 MHz
3) 94.7 MHz
10) 105.9 MHz
5.
5.
M
4.
D1
D3
D4
D5
OK
Instead of using the 3and 4cursor buttons or
the SCAN+ and SCAN– buttons of the remote
controller unit to select characters, characters
can be input from the numeric keys of the
remote control unit. See the below table for
a correspondence between characters and
numeric keys.
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel
or press the MEMO button on the remote.
(notice there is no stations programmed for pre sets
for 4-9), you can have pre set 10 become pre set 5:
To sort the numbers, press and hold the MEMORY
and the 4cursor buttons.
“PRESET SORT” will appear on the display and
sorting will be done.
2.
3.
4.
4.
LIP.SYNC
PREV
MUTE
The stored preset number blinks in the display
for 5 seconds. While blinking, press the CLEAR
button on the front panel or the remote.
USE
PAGE
2
THX
CLEAR
MEMO
2.
5.
6.
0
“xx CLEAR” appears on the display to indicate
that the specified preset number has been
cleared.
4.
Ten keypad
Press, press again, press again, etc.
A → B → C → 1 → A
D → E → F → 2 → D
G → H → I → 3 → G
J → K → L → 4 → J
M → N → O → 5 → M
P → Q → R → 6 → P
S → T → U → 7 → S
V → W → X → 8 → V
Y → Z → space → 9 → Y
– → + → / → 0
Recall the preset number to be inputted name
with the method described in “Recalling” a
preset station.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
Note:
•
To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the
CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel
or press the MEMO button on the remote for
more than 3 seconds.
The left most column of the station name
indicator flashes, indicating the character entry
ready status.
When you press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons on
the front panel or the SCAN+ or SCAN– buttons
on the remote control unit (page 4), alphabetic
and numeric characters will be displayed in the
following order:
A → B → C ... Z → 1 → 2 → 3 ..... 0 → – → +
→ / → (Blank) → A
UP →
→ DOWN
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CHECKING THE XM SIGNAL STRENGTH
AND RADIO ID
SWITCHING XM INFORMATION IN THE FRONT
PANEL DISPLAY
Adjust the antenna location until signal strength
is good.
LISTENING TO XM SATELLITE RADIO
SELECTING AN INPUT SOURCE
3.
4.
You can display XM information (such as artist name/
song title, category or signal status) for the channel
currently selected in the front panel display.
Select channel 0 (XM000) with the 3 or 4
cursor buttons of the SR7001 or the SCAN +
or SCAN – buttons of the remote control unit.
Before you can listen to XM Satellite Radio, you must
first select the input source on the SR7001.
POWER
OFF
ON/OFF
ON
SOURCE
M
4.
M
D1
D2
POWER
2.
1.
OFF
ON/OFF
ON
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
POWER
R8001
OFF
ON/OFF
ON
1.
2.
2.
SOURCE
D33
SOURCE
M
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
D4
D5
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
2.
1.
AAC
PCM
M
SL
SR
USE
DSD
PAGE
1
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
INPUT SELECTOR
4.
4.
USE
PAGE
2
3
4
D11
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUT
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
SLEEP
D2
D3
D4
D5
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
DSD
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
SURROUND
MODE
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
AUTO
M
USE
PAGE
2
3
4
TUNER
TAPE
CD
PURE DIRECT
THX
USE
PAGE
2
STANDBY
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
AUX1
1.
Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.
1.
2.
LIGHT
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
Press the D1 (DISP) button four times to
display the signal status on the front display of
the SR7001.
• The Radio ID is displayed.
Press the > button until PAGE 3 is displayed.
1.
2.
Select the information with the DISP (D1)
X M O O O R A D I O I D
button.
2.
S I G N A L :
Channel number/name
Artist name/Song title
Channel category
Signal Status
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
• The display changes as shown below according to
the receiving condition.
DSD
DOWN
UP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
Note:
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
SIGNAL: ■■■■■■
SIGNAL: STRONG
•
If “ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display,
the XM Connect-and-Play antenna or Passport
system may not be connected to the XM terminal on
the rear panel of this unit properly.
(Signal strength is good)
SIGNAL: ■■■■
SIGNAL: MARGINAL
(Signal strength is Marginal)
(Using the SR7001)
When the Channel number/name mode is displayed:
Turn the INPUT SELECTOR knob to select
1.
2.
“TUNER”.
SIGNAL: ■■
SIGNAL:WEAK
(Signal strength is poor)
X M O 4 0 : D e e p T r c
Press the BAND button to select either XM or
DAB.
4 0 : D e e p T r a c k s
XM NO SIGNAL
SIGNAL: NON
(Using the remote control unit)
To select tuner, Press the TUNER button twice
1.
(Loss of the signal)
(If text is more than 13 characters long, the text is
scrolled.)
within two seconds on the remote.
Press the > button until PAGE 1 is displayed.
Select XM or DAB with the D3 button.
2.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the Artist name/Song title is displayed:
This XM information can also be displayed on a TV
monitor connected to the SR7001.
PRESET SEARCH MODE
SEARCH MODE
CH
VOL
N A M E / T I T L E
TEST
CH.SEL
SURR
You can search for the channel you want to listen to
using one of three search modes. You can also enter
the number directly to select the desired channel.
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
5
OSD
6
OK
2.
1.
DISP
SLEEP
2.
7
8
THX
9
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
P i n k F l o i d /
F l o i d / M o n e y
INPUT SELECTOR
CLEAR
MEMO
0
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PURE
PREV
MUTE
ALL CHANNEL SEARCH MODE
D
TUNER
TAPE
CD
CD-R
AUX2
MD
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
AUX1
MP
M
3.
LIGHT
TUNER
1
2
STANDBY
D1
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
TAPE
AUX1
1.
LIGHT
The “NAME/TITLE” is displayed for 2 seconds,
followed by the artist’s name and song title.
(Ifartist’snameorsongtitleismorethan13characters
long, the text is scrolled.)
1.
1
2
D3
3.
2.
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
D4
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
USE
PAGE
2
OR
D5
Press the AMP button on the remote control
unit.
1.
2.
PURE DIRECT
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
D
L
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
AAC
PCM
S
DSD
(Using the SR7001)
When the channel category is displayed:
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
PresstheOSDbutton.Thefollowinginformation
display will be output.
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
TUNER
TAPE
PURE DIRECT
THX
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front
panel to select the desired preset station.
1.
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
C A T : R o c k
PHONES
AUX1
1.
LIGHT
VIDEO
AUDIO
:DVD
:XM
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
(Using the remote control unit)
Note:
SURR-MODE :AUTO
MULTIROOMA:ON
MULTIROOMB:OFF SPK:OFF
MAIN VOLUME
• To change the display content from XM information
to SR7001 functions, do so from the display mode.
Press the TUNER button twice within two
seconds on the remote.
1.
SPK:OFF
(Using the SR7001)
(See “DISPLAY MODE” on page 47)
CH+ or CH− button to tune in the desired
preset station.
2.
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button on the front
-------------------
1.
panel to select the desired station.
Or enter the preset station number with the
numeric buttons.
(Using the remote control unit)
When this display appears, press the OSD
button again. XM information like the following
will appear.
3.
Press the TUNER button twice within two
1.
seconds on the remote.
Press the > button until PAGE 4 is displayed.
XM INFORMATION
2.
3.
Press and hold the SCAN+ (D1) or SCAN− (D2)
button.
XM
CHAN
NAME
:040
:DeepTracks
:Pink Floid
TITLE :Money
CAT :Rock
SIGNAL:MARGINAL
Press the OSD button again. The information
display will go out.
4.
Note:
•
If the information contains a character that cannot
be recognized by that unit, the character will be
displayed with “ ”(space).
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CATEGORY SEARCH MODE
CHANNEL DIRECT CALL
CHECKING THE XM PRESET CHANNEL
PRESET MEMORY
You can select the desired channel from the category
allocated to each channel.
Category being aired can be only selected.
You can select the desired channel by directly tapping
the numeric keypads on the remote control unit.
The preset channel can be checked on the on screen
display.
You can store the desired channel in the Preset
Memory.
(You can preset 60 XM Radio stations in addition to
FM/AM stations.)
LIP.SYNC
D3
PREV
MUTE
GUIDE
2.
3.
D4
MENU
TEST
EXIT
M
3.4.
CH.SEL
SURR
USE
PAGE
2
4.
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
D
4.
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
3.
2. 4.
CH
VOL
2.
D3
7
8
THX
9
3.
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
CLEAR
MEMO
0
3.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
DIRECT
URROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
USE
PAGE
2
4
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
CH.SEL
SURR
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
SD
E
DIRECT
SURROUND
IGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
TUNER
TAPE
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
4
5
OSD
6
3.
2.
2.
1.
CH
VOL
DSS
MD
AMP
DISP
SLEEP
AUX1
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
SPEAKERS
A/B
1.
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
7
8
THX
9
ENTER
LIGHT
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
MENU
EXIT
TUNER
TAPE
1
2
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
ENTER
CLEAR
MEMO
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
0
MENU
EXIT
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
AUX1
1.
LIGHT
TUNER
TAPE
CD
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
AUX1
LIGHT
1
2
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
(Using the remote control unit)
Press the TUNER button twice within two
seconds on the remote.
Press the TUNER button twice within two
seconds on the remote.
1.
2.
(Using the SR7001)
1.
Tune into the desired channel.
(Using the SR7001)
1.
2.
Press the GUIDE.
Press the > button until PAGE 2 is display.
2.
3.
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel.
Press the ENTER button on the front panel.
1.
2.
Press the P-INFO (D5) button. to view a list of
tuner preset channeI on the on screen display.
“XM - - -” will appear on the display.
”- -” (preset number) starts blinking on the
Press the 1 or 2 button on the front panel to
select the desired Category.
Input the three digit number for your desired
Channel with the numeric keypad on the
remote control unit.
3.
dispIay.
If there are 10 or more preset channel, Press
the P-lNFO button. again.
4.
After selecting the Category, Press the 3or 4
cursor button to select the desired station of the
category.
- - X M 0 4 0
3.
XM
PRESET LIST
The desired channel will automatically be
tuned.
4.
NO. 1 XM010 XXXXXXXXXX
NO. 2 XM011 XXXXXXXXXX
NO. 3 XM015 XXXXXXXXXX
NO. 4 XM022 XXXXXXXXXX
NO. 5 XM125 XXXXXXXXXX
NO. 6 XM001 Preview
NO. 7 XM001 Preview
NO. 8 XM001 Preview
NO. 9 XM001 Preview
NO.10 XM001 Preview
Select the preset number by pressing the 1
or 2 cursor buttons, While this is still blinking
(approx. 5 seconds)
You can return to the normal mode by press the
ENTER button during Category Search Mode.
3.
4.
Note:
4.
•
If there is no input on the keypad for 5sec., the input
is cancelled to return to the original display
(Using the remote control unit)
0 1 X M 0 4 0
Notes:
Press the TUNER button twice within two
seconds on the remote.
1.
•
•
•
•
“LOADING” is displayed while receiving the
channel or information.
Press the MEMORY button again to enter.
Press the > button until PAGE 4 is display.
2.
Note:
“UPDATING”isdisplayedwhileupdatingencryption
code.
The display stops blinking.
Press the CAT+ (D4) or CAT− (D5) button.
•
The preset channel indication disappears in about 5
sec.
3.
The station is now stored in the specified
preset memory location.
When the selected channel is not available, “XM - -
-” is dispIayed.
After selecting the category, Press the SCAN+
(D1) or SCAN− (D2) button to select the
desired station of the category.
4.
“OFF AIR” is displayed while air is suspended (e.g.
midnight).
(Using the remote control unit)
You can return to the normal mode by press the
OK button during Category Search Mode.
5.
Tune into the desired channel.
1.
2.
Press the MEMO button on the remote. “- -”
(preset number) starts blinking on the display.
Note:
• Category search ends automatically about 5 seconds
after the last operation.
Enter the desired preset number by pressing
the numeric buttons.
3.
Note:
•
When entering a single digit number (2 for example),
either input “02” or just input “2” and wait for a few
seconds.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PRESET SCAN
CLEARING STORED PRESET STATIONS
You can remove preset stations from the memory
using the following procedure.
M
D1
D2
D3
2. 3.
3.5.
2.
DD44
TEST
CH.SEL
SURR
CH
VOL
USE
PAGE
2
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
D5
V
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
SURROUND
DIGITAL
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
OK
SL
SR
7
8
THX
9
DOWN
5.
3.
2.
CLEAR
MEMO
0
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
ER
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
DISPLAY
TUNER
TAPE
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
SPEAKERS
A/B
MultEQ
MIC
PREV
MUTE
ENTER
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
AUX1
DIGITAL
1.
MENU
TEST
EXIT
LIGHT
CH.SEL
SURR
1
2
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
TUNER
CD-R
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
Press the TUNER button twice within two
seconds on the remote.
Recall the preset number to be cleared with
the method described in ”PRESET SEARCH
MODE”.
1.
1.
Press the > button until PAGE 2 is displayed.
2.
3.
Press the MEMORY button on the front panel
or Press the MEMO button on the remote.
2.
3.
press the P-SCAN (D4) button on the remote
control unit. “PRESET SCAN” appears on the
display and then the preset station with the
lowest preset number is recalled first.
The stored preset number blinks in the display
for5seconds. WhiIeblinking, PresstheCLEAR
button on the front panel or the remote.
Preset stations are recalled in sequence (No.1
→ No.2 → etc.) for about 5-10 seconds each.
The time changes by the received condition.
No stored preset number will be skipped.
4.
5.
“xx CLEAR” appears on the dispIay to indicate
that the specified preset number has been
cleared.
4.
Note:
Pressing the CH+ button during prescanning
speeds up scanning.
• To clear all stored preset stations, press and hold the
CLEAR and the ENTER buttons for two seconds.
Also, pressing the CH– button returns to the
• There are 60 preset channels prepared at the factory
default. The 60 channels are all set to “CHANNEL
001”. Each channel can be stored in the preset
memory. You can search for only the preset
channels.
previous preset station.
When the desired preset station is received,
cancel the preset scan operation by press the
P-SCAN (D4) button.
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
– SR7001 –
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI
ROOM OUT TERMINALS
MULTI ROOM PLAYBACK USING THE MULTI
SPEAKER TERMINALS
MULTI ROOM
SYSTEM
The unit enters multi room mode and the display
indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the
“MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.
The SR7001 allows you to connect another set
of speakers and place them in a different room or
separated area for Iistening to music.
2.
1.
The Multiroom System mode allows the same source
or different sources to be heard in two rooms other
than where this receiver is installed.
Select an input source with the INPUT
SELECTOR knob.
3.
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
2.
1.
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of
the room used in the multiroom system as you
like.
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
4.
DSD
DOWN
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
To use the multiroom system, connect the audio from
the MULTI OUT A and B AUDIO output terminals to
the MULTI ROOM A and B amps.
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
STANDBY
ENTER
C
LFE
S
L
R
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DIGITAL
L
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
DSD
DOWN
Note:
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features
can also be set using the MAIN MENU. (See page
37.)
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
Note:
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
• The SR7001 does not have a MULTI ROOM B
setting.
Notes for Multi Room Speaker
Pressing the MULTI button on the receiver one
time accesses the MULTI ROOM A settings.
Pressing it two times accesses the MULTI
ROOM B settings. Then, pressing it a third time
turns the multiroom feature off. (The SR7001
does not have a MULTI ROOM B setting.)
• The Multiroom Speaker mode can be set for only
one of the rooms, A or B.
1.
2.
Connect the VIDEO output (MULTI OUT) terminal to
the monitor in Room A.
(MULTI VIDEO OUT terminal is linked to the source
selector in Multi Room A.)
• The MULTI ROOM SPEAKER output terminals can
be used when Surround Back Speaker = “NONE”
in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See SPEAKER
SETUP, page 27)
Pressing the MULTI SPEAKER button on
the receiver one time accesses the MULTI
SPEAKER A settings. Pressing it two times
accesses the MULTI SPEAKER B settings.
Then, pressing it a third time turns the MULTI
SPEAKER feature off.
1.
2.
If a surround channel back speaker or speaker C
(see page 20) are not used in the room where this
receiver is installed, the multi speaker system can be
used with the amp for the surround back channel.
• “The Surr. Back Speakers are in use” is displayed
when the MULTI SPEAKER button is pressed
when the Surround Back Speaker is not set to
“NONE” in the SPEAKER SETUP menu. (See
SPEAKER SETUP, page 27)
When the MULTI ROOM setting mode is
engaged, one of the following screens appears
on the display for 10 seconds.
(TheSR7001doesnothaveaMULTISPEAKER
B setting.)
Also, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT 2
terminal can be used for the monitor output of Room
A.
– SR8001 –
• The Multispeaker mode cannot be used at the
same time as the speaker C. When connecting for
multiroom use, set the SPEAKER C selector switch
on the rear panel to OFF.
* Display when MULTI ROOM A is selected
When the MULTI SPEAKER setting mode is
engaged, one of the following screens appears
on the display for 10 seconds.
(This feature cannot be used with the SR7001.)
M A D V D
- 1 8 d B
This receiver supports multiroom system functions
such as source selectors, OSD menu systems, sleep
timers and remote control.
– SR8001 –
* Display when MULTI ROOM B is selected
* Display when MULTI SPEAKER A is selected
M B D V D
- 1 8 d B
M S A D V D - 1 8 d B
– SR7001 –
* Display when MULTI SPEAKER B is selected
The unit enters multi room mode and the display
indicates “SELECT SOURCE” and flashes the
“MULTI” indicator for approx. 10 seconds.
M S B D V D - 1 8 d B
Select an input source with the INPUT
SELECTOR knob.
3.
Turn the VOLUME knob to set the volume of
the room used in the multi room system as you
like.
4.
Note:
• The sleep timer, monaural output and other features
can also be set using the MAIN MENU.
(See page 37)
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Press the VOL+ or VOL− button on the
multi room remote control to set the desired
volume.
OPERATION OF THE MULTI ROOM OUTPUTS
WITH THE REMOTE CONTROL FROM MULTI A
2.
3.
Room A output can be operated from a room
where the receiver is not installed. This requires a
separately sold IR receiver. (For connections, see
page 12.)
In multi room mode, the multi room remote
control can be used in the multiroom to operate
the following functions.
General:
Controlling volume level, sleep timer, and muting.
SeIecting input audio and video source.
Tuner:
M
1.
D4
D5
D2
USE
PAGE
2
4
D3
D4
D5
Selecting band, controlling preset channel up and
down, tuning up and down direct frequency call.
USE
PAGE
1
2
3
4
CH
VOL
1.
1.
Notes for the Multi Room System
• The MULTI ROOM OUT (MULTl OUT/MULTI
SPEAKER) has analog outputs.
2.
2.
OK
TV
DVD
VCR
CD-R
AUX2
DSS
MD
AMP
This does not support digital input signals.
TUNER
TAPE
CD
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
• If the Tuner (FM, AM or XM) is active in the main
room, you can not control any function of the tuner.
In this case, You must listen to the same station as the
main room.
PREV
MUTE
AUX1
LIGHT
MENU
TEST
EXIT
1
2
CH.SEL
SURR
RC8500SR
Learning Remote Controller
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
5
6
• When the component with RC-5 bus is connected
to the MULTI RC IN jack(see page 20), Multiroom
A can be operated using the RC codes for the main
room. The remote control units of other Marantz
products can also be used to control multiroom A.
(Room B output cannot be operated from another
room.)
Press MULTI on the multi room remote control
from the MULTI ROOM.
1.
(Press the AMP button and press the > button
until PAGE 4 is displayed. Press the MULTI
(D1) button.)
This operations will put the SR7001 into multi
room mode and “MULTI” will be illuminated on
the display.
MULTl ROOM Video out put will show OSD
information for the MULTI ROOM setup.
MULTI ROOM A
VIDEO
AUDIO
SLEEP
:DSS
:FM 102.00MHz
:90 min
MONO/ST:STEREO
MULTI:OFF
VOL :VARI
LEVEL:-90dB
MAPKR:OFF
VOL :VARI
LEVEL:-90dB
--- MAIN ROOM STATUS ---
VIDEO:DVD AUDIO:DVD
RETURN
BACK
EXIT
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
REMOTE CONTROLLER OPERATION
CONTROLLING MARANTZ COMPONENTS
Press the desired function button.
1.
• The selected function name and USE are displayed in the LCD.
Press the desired operation buttons to play the selected component.
2.
• For details, refer to the component’s user guide.
• It may not be possible to operate some models.
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ DVD PLAYER (DVD MODE)
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD PLAYER (CD MODE)
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ VCR (VCR MODE)
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the DVD player on and off
POWER ON Turns the DVD player on
POWER OFF Turns the DVD player off
D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD player on and off
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the VCR on and off
D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)
POWER ON Turns the CD player on
POWER OFF Turns the CD player off
D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)
POWER
ON/OFF
POWER
ON/OFF
POWER
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
MENU
EXIT
Call up the menu
Exits the programming menu
SOURCE
SOURCE
SOURCE
M
M
M
Cursor/OK
MENU
0-9
Move the cursor, enters the setting
Calls up the menu of DVD disc
MENU
0-9
Switches the display information
Input the numeric
0-9
2
4 / ¢
9
;
0
Input the numeric
Play
D
1
1
D
1
1
1
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D2
D3
D4
D5
D2
D3
D4
D5
Input the numeric
Call up the programming menu
MEMO
CLEAR
2
4 / ¢
9
Programs
Clears the inputting
Skip forward or previous track
Stop
MEMO
CLEAR
2
USE
USE
USE
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
1
1
Clears the inputting
Play
Play
Skip forward or previous track
Pause
Record
CH
VOL
CH
VOL
CH
VOL
4 / ¢
Skip forward or previous chapter/
track
Stop
Stop
Pause
;
OK
OK
9
;
Pause
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
PREV
MUTE
PREV
MUTE
MENU
TEST
EXIT
MENU
TEST
EXIT
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
CH.SEL
SURR
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7
8
THX
9
7
8
THX
9
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
CLEAR
MEMO
CLEAR
MEMO
0
0
0
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TV
DVD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
1
2
1
2
1
2
RC8001SR
RC8001SR
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
Learning Remote Controller
Learning Remote Controller
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ CD RECORDER (CDR MODE)
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ MD DECK (MD MODE)
CONTROLLING A MARANTZ TAPE DECK (TAPE MODE)
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the CD recorder on and off
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the MD deck on and off
SOURCE ON/OFF Turns the TAPE deck on and off
POWER ON Turns the CD recorder on
POWER OFF Turns the CD recorder off
D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)
POWER ON Turns the MD deck on
POWER OFF Turns the MD deck off
D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)
POWER ON Turns the TAPE deck on
POWER OFF Turns the TAPE deck off
D1 - D5 / >(Page) (Refer to page vi)
POWER
ON/OFF
POWER
ON/OFF
POWER
ON/OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SOURCE
SOURCE
SOURCE
M
M
M
MENU
0-9
Switches the display information
Input the numeric
MENU
0-9
Switches the display information
Input the numeric
0-9
MEMO
Input the numeric
Programs
D
1
1
D
1
1
1
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D2
D3
D4
D5
D2
D3
D4
D5
MEMO
CLEAR
2
4 / ¢
9
Programs
Clears the inputting
MEMO
CLEAR
2
4 / ¢
9
Programs
Clears the inputting
CLEAR
2
4 / ¢
9
;
0
Clears the inputting
Play
USE
USE
PAGE
USE
PAGE
1
PAGE
1
1
Play
Skip forward or previous track
Play
Skip forward or previous track
Skip forward or previous track
Stop
CH
VOL
CH
VOL
CH
VOL
Stop
Pause
Record
Stop
Pause
Record
Pause
Record
;
0
;
0
OK
OK
OK
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
LIP.SYNC
GUIDE
PREV
MUTE
PREV
MUTE
PREV
MUTE
MENU
TEST
EXIT
MENU
TEST
EXIT
MENU
TEST
EXIT
CH.SEL
SURR
CH.SEL
SURR
CH.SEL
SURR
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
1
7.1CH
2
ATT
3
SPK-AB
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
4
DISP
5
OSD
6
SLEEP
7
8
THX
9
7
8
THX
9
7
8
THX
9
CLEAR
MEMO
CLEAR
MEMO
CLEAR
MEMO
0
0
0
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
AMP
TV
DVD
CD
VCR
DSS
MD
AMP
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
TUNER
TAPE
CD-R
AUX2
AUX1
AUX1
AUX1
LIGHT
LIGHT
LIGHT
1
2
1
2
1
2
RC8001SR
RC8001SR
RC8001SR
Learning Remote Controller
Learning Remote Controller
Learning Remote Controller
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
See the attached manufacturer number list for the
preset manufacturers, devices, preset numbers, and
other settings.
This example shows how to set a DVD player.
View the supplied manufacturer number list,
and find the number of the manufacturer for the
device that you are using.
BASIC OPERATION
USE MODE
1.
2.
3.
4
5
7
Remote control
source name
Corresponding
preset code
Device name
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
(Normal operation status)
TV
TV
Television
DVD player
Video deck
LEARN
LEARN
more.
This remote control is preset with a total of 12 types
of remote codes, including Marantz TV (television),
DVD, VCR (VCR deck), DSS (satellite broadcasting
tuner), TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD, TAPE (tape deck),
AUX1, AUX2, and AMP (amplifier).
The menu is displayed.
DVD
VCR
DSS
DVD
VCR
Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.
The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.
SATELLITE
Satellite broadcasting
tuner equipment
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
TUNER
CD
RECEIVER/TUNER
CD/CD-R PLAYER
AM FM TUNER
CD player
Press the DVD source button.
4.
5.
Turn on the power of the DVD player.
1.
2.
Learning is not necessary for Marantz products. You
can use these products without setting any codes.
CD-R
MD
CD/CD-R PLAYER CD recorder
CD/CD-R PLAYER MD deck
Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
digit manufacturer number.
more.
TAPE
AUX1
AUX2
AMP
TAPE
Cassette deck
Example: To enter “0600” from the manufacturer
The menu is displayed.
Press the SOURCE button.
1.
CABLE
Cable television
Laser disc player
Amplifier or receiver
number list.
For this example, press DVD.
Press the D1 (PRESET) direct button.
LASER DISC
AMPLIFIER
RECEIVER/TUNER
1
2
To correct the entered number, use the
cursor button to enter the correct number.
or
3.
DVD is shown on the LCD, and the remote control
is set for DVD.
Pressing the SOURCE button once changes the
remote control to the settings for the source that
was pressed.
To change the amplifier or other source, press the
SOURCE button twice (double-click). The code
is sent, and then the amplifier source changes to
DVD.
The Preset setting (P-SET) is displayed.
Press the DVD source button.
• If no button is pressed for over one minute
during the setting process, any settings that
were made are cancelled.
4.
5.
• When using Marantz products, TV and DVD can
be set to TV1 (TV/VDP: Projector) and TV2 (PDP:
Plasma display), and DVD1 (first DVD player) and
DVD2 (second DVD player), respectively, to match
the customer’s operating environment. These
settings are made in PRESET mode.
Hold down the CH+ or CH– button for one
second or more.
Press the OK cursor button.
Press the CH+ button repeatedly in the interval
6.
7.
6.
for one second.
Confirm the OK is displayed and then the
The signal is transmitted, and the display cycles
display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).
through the code number.
Press the CH– button to go back to a number
screen.
When the manufacturer number is entered correctly,
Press the buttons to operate the DVD.
In the factory default state, the remote control is
set to TV1 and DVD1. To make the presets, enter
the numbers below while referring to the section
“Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number
Directly”.
2.
OK is displayed momentarily on the screen.
The
indicator is shown on the LCD while the
remote control codes are being transmitted. It is not
displayed when buttons without stored code are
pressed.
• Ifyouenteranumbernotinthemanufacturer
number list, WRONG CODE is displayed,
and then you return to the preset setting
again
Release the button once the DVD player turns
off.
7.
The direct buttons can be used to perform up
to 20 operations for each of the 12 sources,
including DVD, TV, AMP, and other AV
TV1: 0001, TV2: 0002
DVD1: 0001, DVD2: 0002
3.
Press the OK cursor button.
8.
9.
Confirm the OK is displayed and then the
display returns to the Preset Setting (P-SET).
Check the manufacturer number list, and
either set a different number or use the
sequence function to set.
equipment.
Entering and Setting the Manufacturer Number Di-
rectly
The buttons consist of the D1 to D5 buttons, and
To set the manufacturer number for another
source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4
to 8.
10.
the equipment is operated by pressing the buttons
corresponding to the indicators on the LCD.
Four pages are available, and press the > button
to select a page. The current page position is
displayed on the LCD.
To set the manufacturer number for another
source device, repeat the procedure in steps 4
to 6.
8.
Refer to the manufacturer number list.
This example shows how to set a SAMSUNG DVD
player.
After the settings are completed, press the M
button.
11.
12.
After the settings are completed, press the M
button.
9.
2
3
6
4
Press the buttons on the remote control to
check that the DVD can be operated correctly.
Press the buttons on the remote control to
check that the DVD can be operated correctly.
10.
PRESET MODE
LEARN
LEARN
Check the following points if the equipment which
was set does not operate properly.
• Ifthereismorethanonenumberinthemanufacturer
number list, try setting a different number.
(When operating non-Marantz AV equipment
products)
Setting Equipment Not Appearing in Manufacturer
Number List
USE
PAGE
1
1
2
1
2
This remote control is preset with remote control
codes from AV equipment by other manufacturers.
The preset codes are TV, VCR, LD, CABLE, DSS,
DVD, TAPE, TUNER, CD/CD-R, MD and AMP.
Settings can be made in one of two ways.
When the preset codes are set, the following codes
are contained in the SOURCE button of the remote
control.
Use the sequence function to set equipment not
appearing in the manufacturer number list. You may
still be unable to set some equipment even when
using the sequence function. In this case, the remote
control can be programmed with codes individually.
In the sequence function, the power ON/OFF codes
are transmitted by pressing the remote control
buttons in order.
• There may be some buttons which cannot be
used. Program the codes to the required buttons.
5
LEARN
LEARN
1
2
1 2
If the power for the equipment is left on, hold down
the button until the equipment is turned off, and then
release. This completes the setting.
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
prevented the command from being learned. If this
happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.
In some rare cases, ERROR may be displayed
repeatedly during the learning operation. In this
case, the transmitting remote control may have
special signal codes. These codes cannot be
learned by this remote control.
LEARN MODE
Programming the Direct Buttons and Rewriting
Names
To change the name, press the numeric
buttonsto enter the text.
7.
8.
2
Programming the (PLAY) and Other Control But-
tons and Numeric Buttons
This example shows how to program codes from
other manufacturer products to the DVD MENU
button (D1) and change the display to OSD.
• Use the cursor buttons 1 2 to move to the
sections to be rewritten on the LCD.
This remote control is capable of learning and storing
codes used by other remote controls that you already
own.
For codes which are not learned, the remote control
will transmit either the Marantz preset codes from
the initial settings, or remote codes from another
manufacturer’s AV equipment which is set by the
customer.
• To change MENU to OSD, press the 5
numeric button.
6
7
8
Follow the same procedure to make the remote
control learn the other buttons.
7.
8.
Each time the button is pressed, the display
cycles through M → N → O → 5 → M.
Repeat the procedure in steps 3 to 6 to have
the remote control learn the signal codes from
a TV, CD player, or other AV equipment.
LEARN
LEARN
LEARN
After rewriting of the text is completed, press
the OK cursor button.
To delete text that is already entered, press the 0
The receiver sensor for the remote control signals is
located at the top of the remote control.
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
button to insert a space.
• When no buttons are pressed for
approximately one minute during the
learning operation, the remote control
automatically returns to USE mode.
• In this example, MENU is changed to “OSD
(space) (space)” in this step, and then OSD
is displayed in the right side by pressing the
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
3.
This example shows how to learn the codes from the
remote control of a DVD player.
more.
The menu is displayed.
OK button.
• When programming the source buttons,
switch to the source in step 3, and then
press the source button again.
1
2
4
For details, refer to the section “Rewriting Names”.
Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.
The LEARN setting (LEARN) indicator is displayed.
In the same way, use the > button to select
the page, and then press the direct button to
program the codes.
LEARN
9.
The
indicator then blinks.
LEARN
LEARN
9. When you have finished programming the
Press the DVD source button.
codes for each button, press the M button.
The first page of the direct button screen is
USE
The
indicator is displayed on the LCD, and the
displayed. There are four available pages. Pressing
the > buttons cycles through the pages in this order
1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 1.
After programming the codes for each of the
10.
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
1
2
1
2
newly stored codes can be used.
buttons, press the M button.
USE
The
indicator displays on the LCD, and the
• If FULL is displayed on the LCD, the
memory cannot hold any more learned
codes in LEARN mode.
newly stored codes can be transmitted.
6 (When OK) (failed)
(codes are full)
Press the D1 (MENU) direct button.
4.
5.
LEARN
The
indicator blinks, and then displays to
indicate that learning is ready.
REWRITING NAMES
If FULL is displayed no matter how many
times you try the learning operation, the
remote control cannot accept any more new
codes until some of the previously learned
codes are deleted from the memory. Delete
some of the learned buttons from the
sources.
LEARN
LEARN
Place the receiver sensor of the remote control
(top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the
DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about
5 cm (2 inches).
This remote control allows the rewriting of names
for the sources and direct buttons. This operation is
performed for each individual source.
This example shows how to change the source name
from DVD to AVD and AUDIO to SOUND.
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
Press and hold down the OSD button of the
transmitting DVD remote control, and check that
6.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
3
4
5
more.
OK is displayed on the LCD.
The menu is displayed.
The M button and > button cannot be taught. Only
each one code can be learned for the LIGHT buttons
1 and 2, regardless of the source.
The remote control has finished learning when OK
is displayed on the LCD.
Press the D2 (LEARN) direct button.
The LEARN setting (LEARN) is displayed. The
LEARN
LEARN
If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has
prevented the command from being learned. If this
happens, repeat the procedure for steps 4 and 5.
NAME
NAME
indicator then blinks.
Press the DVD source button.
PAGE
USE
1
2
PAGE
PAGE
1
1
2
2
3.
4.
• After learning is completed, the remote
control automatically switches to name
rewriting mode. The left end “ ” indicator
on the MENU blinks to indicate that the
blinking part can be rewritten.
Press the 2(PLAY) button.
LEARN
The
indicator blinks, and then displays to
7
8
9
indicate that learning is ready.
Place the receiver sensor of the remote control
(top) so that it is facing the transmitter of the
DVD remote control (top) at a distance of about
5 cm (2 inches).
5.
6.
NAME
NAME
NAME
• If no names will be rewritten, press the
OK cursor button. The display returns to
learning standby mode by pressing the OK
cursor button.
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
Press and hold down the 2(PLAY) button of the
transmitting DVD remote control, and check that
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
OK is displayed on the LCD.
more.
The remote control has finished learning when OK
The menu is displayed.
is displayed on the LCD.
If ERROR is displayed on the LCD, some error has
Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ERASING PROGRAMMED CODES
(RETURNING TO INITIAL SETTINGS)
Press the DVD source button .
Press the AMP source button .
Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.
3.
6.
7.
6.
7.
NAME
All codes and names programmed to page 2 are
The
indicator blinks.
Press the > button to display the first page for
AMP.
erased. When the codes are cleared, the codes
for this button reset to the factory default code or
become blank. Any rewritten names return to the
original name.
The “ ” blinks to indicate that the letter can be
changed.
Codes can be erased in five ways: by buttons, direct
buttons, direct button pages, sources, and by all
memory contents.
Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button to be erased
while holding down the CLEAR button .
8.
9.
Press the 2cursor button twice.
4.
5.
The D in DVD blinks to indicate that the letter can
• To cancel the erasing operation, press the
D5 (NO) button to return to the previous
screen.
be changed.
Erasing Buttons and Erasing Direct Buttons
Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.
The code programmed to the AUTO button is
Press the 1 numeric button to select A.
This example shows how to erase the code learned
from the PLAY button of the DVD player and the
AUTO code of the AMP direct button.
erased.
Each time the numeric buttons are pressed, the
When the code is cleared, the code for this button
resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.
The rewritten name returns to the original name.
button cycles through the alphanumeric characters
shown below.
1: A → B → C → 1 → A
2: D → E → F → 2 → D
3: G → H → I → 3 → G
4: J → K → L → 4 → J
5: M → N → O → 5 → M
6: P → Q → R → 6 → P
7: S → T → U → 7 → S
When the erasing operation is finished, press
the M button .
Erasing buttons
USE
The
indicator lights up to indicate that the
• To cancel the erasing operation, press the
D5 (NO) button to return to the previous
screen.
remote control can now be operated.
1
3
4
Erasing Sources
LEARN
LEARN
This procedure clears all codes and names
programmed to the DVD, TV, or other sources. All
codes and names in the four direct button pages are
also erased.
When the erasing operation is finished, press
10.
the M button .
USE
The
indicator displays to indicate that the
8: V → W → X → 8 → V
9: Y → Z → / → 9 → Y
USE
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
1
2
remote control can now be operated.
This example shows how to erase the names and
codes learned from the DVD player.
0: SPACE ( ) → + → — → , → ’ → < → > → ? → 0
Erasing Direct Button Pages
→ SPACE (
)
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
more.
This example shows how to erase the entire direct
button second page learned from the DVD player.
1
3
4
Press the 1or 2cursor button .
6.
7.
The menu is displayed.
The letter is changed to “A”.
Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .
2.
3.
1
3
4
• The 3and 4cursor buttons can be used to
move the blinking indicator of the section to
be rewritten.
LEARN
LEARN
Press the DVD source button .
USE
LEARN
The
and
indicators blink.
LEARN
LEARN
Press the button 2 (PLAY) that you want to
4.
Press the 3 or 4 cursor buttons to select
AUDIO on the direct button indicator. The
A flashes to indicate that the name can be
changed.
USE
USE
USE
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
1
2
1
2
erase while holding down the CLEAR button .
A message is displayed on the LCD.
USE
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
1
2
1
2
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.
5.
more.
2
The code programmed to the (PLAY) button is
The menu is displayed.
5
Press the 7 numeric button to select S.
8.
9.
erased.
Each time the button is pressed, the button cycles
When the code is cleared, the code for this button
resets to the factory default code or becomes blank.
Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .
2.
3.
through S → T → U → 7 → S.
Press the DVD source button .
Press the 2cursor button to move the flashing
section.
LEARN
• To cancel the erasing operation, press the
D5 (NO) button to return to the previous
display.
USE
LEARN
The
and
indicators blink.
Press the DVD source button while holding
down the CLEAR button .
4.
5.
Press the 5 numeric button to select 0.
10.
11.
USE
PAGE
1
2
To erase codes programmed for the CLEAR
button, simply press the CLEAR button
twice.
Follow the same procedure to enter U, N, and
D.
Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.
All codes and names programmed to the DVD
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
source are erased. When the codes are cleared,
the codes for this button reset to the factory default
code or become blank. Any rewritten names return
to the original name.
When finished entering the text, press the OK
cursor button .
12.
13.
more.
To erase codes programmed for the
SOURCEbutton,simplypresstheSOURCE
button twice.
The menu is displayed.
Press the M button .
Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .
2.
3.
USE
The
indicator displays on the LCD, and the
Press the DVD source button .
• To cancel the erasing operation, press the
D5 (NO) button to return to the previous
display.
newly stored codes can be used.
The input is overwritten, and so the currently
displayed text is erased.
LEARN
USE
The
and
indicators blink.
Erasing direct buttons
Press the > button to display the second
6
8
9
4.
5.
Up to six characters can be entered for the direct
button indicator.
page.
When the erasing operation is finished, press
6.
the M button .
The
Press the > button while holding down the
USE
indicator displays to indicate that the
remote control can now be operated.
LEARN
LEARN
LEARN
CLEAR button .
USE
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
USE
PAGE
1
2
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Note:
• If the signal transmission interval (interval time)
Erasing All
EXECUTING MACRO PROGRAMS
Press the buttons in the sequence that you
4.
want the operations performed.
This procedure clears (resets) all programmed
codes and names. Once all the data is cleared, the
memory is returned to the factory default status. The
programmed macros are also erased.
1
2
3
is changed using the Setup mode (described later),
this transmission interval is applied to all macro
programs. To change individual signal transmission
intervals, use the procedures in this section for
programming macros and revising macros.
• No signals are transmitted while programming a
macro.
The actual program starts here.
Each time a button is pressed, the name of the
button is displayed on the LCD.
4-1
4-2
4-3
1
3
4
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
• The M button, > button, cursor buttons, MEMO
button, CLEAR button, and VOL buttons cannot
be programmed.
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
LEARN
Press the M button shortly.
1.
The macro menu is displayed.
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
• If no button is pressed for approximately one
minute during programming, the remote control
returns to the state before macro mode.
USE
PAGE
1
2
USE
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
1
2
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .
2.
3.
Check that the operations of the program are
Press the DVD source button .
4-1.
4-2.
4-3.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
In this case, the macro program is not stored.
executed step by step.
more.
Press the 2(PLAY) button .
The name of the operation button is displayed on
• When executing macro mode, performing the
source switching operation two or more times
only changes the remote control mode and does
not transmit any signals. (Switching of the source
selector of the amplifier is valid only once.)
The menu is displayed.
the LCD.
Press the 3or 4cursor buttons .
The interval time is displayed on the LCD.
Press the D5 (ERASE) direct button .
2.
3.
• The programmed section is indicated by
&. The bar indicator moves to indicate the
progress of the program.
Select DVD source → PLAY transmit → Interval
time: 2 seconds → Select TV → TV INPUT transmit
→ Select AMP → AUTO transmit → End
USE
LEARN
The
and
indicators blink.
Press the 3or 4cursor buttons and set to 2.0
4-4.
Press the CLEAR button while holding down
the POWER ON and OFF buttons at the same
time.
(seconds).
• Use the 3cursor button to increase the time
and the 4button to decrease the time. The
interval time can be set from 0.5 seconds to
5 seconds.
PROGRAMMING MACROS
Press the D4 (YES) direct button to erase.
4.
This example shows how to program a macro to the
M-01 button.
(The screens shown in the example are the default
factory states. If the names of direct buttons
were rewritten, these modified names would be
displayed.)
Switch amplifier to DVD source → Play DVD player
→ Set the interval to 2 seconds until the next signal is
sent → Switch TV to video input → Set the amplifier
mode to AUTO
All programmed codes and names are erased and
• To cancel transmission of the program while
it is in progress, press any button.
reset to the factory default settings.
• To stop the time adjustment, press the D5
(CANCEL) direct button.
• To cancel the erasing operation, press the
D5 (NO) button to return to the previous
screen.
CHANGING NAMES OF MACRO PROGRAMS
Press the OK cursor button .
4-5.
4-6.
4-7.
4-8.
4-9.
4-10.
4-11.
4-12.
Under the factory default settings, the names of the
macro programs are set from M-01 to M-20, but you
can change them to any desired name.
The text can have up to six characters, and it is
entered using the numeric buttons.
Press the TV source button .
• To erase all operation takes a few seconds
after the D4 (YES) button is pressed.
Press the > button to display the first page.
Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button .
Press the AMP source button .
This example shows how to change the M-01 name
to MOVIE.
1
2
3
PROGRAMMING MACROS
Press the > button to display the first page.
Press the D1 (AUTO) direct button .
This remote control can program a series of button
operations in sequence.
1
2
3
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
Press the OK cursor button .
Macros are a function that makes it possible to use
a single button operation to perform a complex
series of button operations any number of times. A
single button can be programmed to perform up to
20 steps in sequence. A total of 20 buttons can be
programmed with macros.
The LCD displays END to indicate that programming
is completed.
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
PAGE
1
1
2
To program another macro, repeat the
procedure in steps 3 to 4-12.
5.
6.
USE
PAGE
1
PAGE
2
PAGE
1
1
2
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
3.
To exit macro programming, press the M button
more.
.
The menu is displayed.
• For example, the following sequence of operations
can be programmed to a macro.
4
5
6
USE
The
indicator displays to indicate that the
remote control can now be operated.
When the macro are programmed 20 operations or
more, the display returns macro menu.
Edit the macro so that it has 20 operations or less.
Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .
Switch amplifier to DVD source → Set amplifier
mode to AUTO → Play DVD player → Switch TV
to video input
The macro menu is displayed.
MACRO
LEARN
The
indicator displays and
blinks.
NAME
NAME
NAME
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .
The factory default for the transmission interval
(time) between macro operations is one second,
but these signal transmission intervals can be set
between approximately 0.5 seconds and 5 seconds
in the Setup mode. Each transmission interval can
be adjusted independently when programming or
revising a macro.
The menu has four pages, and so use the > button
PAGE
PAGE
1
PAGE
1
2
2
1
2
to select the page when programming other buttons.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
more.
The menu is displayed.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CLEARING MACRO PROGRAMS
Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.
Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.
Press the TV source button.
2.
2.
6.
7.
The macro menu is displayed.
The macro menu is displayed.
TV blinks for 0.5 seconds.
When clearing macros, the macros programmed to
the button are erased. Modified macro names are
also returned to the factory default settings. This
example shows how to clear a macro with the name
MOVIE programmed to M-02.
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
The
indicator displays and
blinks.
The
indicator displays and
blinks.
Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.
INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds.
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.
3.
4.
3.
4.
The NAME is displayed.
TV and INPUT are overwritten.
Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.
The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is
• To check the modified steps, press the 1or
2cursor button.
Press the D3 (NAME) direct button .
9
indicated by
.
The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.
1
4
5
&
The programmed section is indicated by
.
To exit, press the M button.
Press the 5 numeric button to select M.
8.
5.
6.
When finished, to change another macro program,
Press the 2cursor button to display TV.
5.
6.
Press the 2cursor button to next.
press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,
and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 8.
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
The “ ” blinks to indicate that rewriting is possible.
Press the CLEAR button .
The LCD displays CLEAR, and TV and INPUT are
MACRO
Press the 5 numeric button to select O.
7.
8.
deleted.
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
When deleting steps from a macro program, the
operations performed for a source after switching to
the source are also deleted.
If the CLEAR button is pressed at the INPUT
position, only the INPUT step is deleted.
Repeat steps 6 and 7, and then enter V, I, E
and “ (space)”.
INSERTING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS
This example shows how to change the macro
programmed to M-01 from
DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO
to
Press the M button for three second or more.
• To make changes in the text while entering
it, use the 1or 2cursor buttons to move to
the blinking section.
1.
2.
3.
4.
The macro menu is displayed.
&
The indicator for the step is also changed.
Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button .
The macro menu is displayed.
DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT → AMP → AUTO
After making the changes, press the OK cursor
button.
• To check the modified steps, press the 1or
2cursor button.
9.
Press the D2 (MOVIE) direct button while
holding down the CLEAR button.
4
6
8
• To change the names of other macro
programs, repeat the procedure in steps 3
to 9.
To exit, press the M button.
7.
When finished, to change another macro program,
Press the D4 (YES) direct button to clear the
press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,
and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 6.
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
macro.
NAME
To cancel the clearing operation, press the NO (D5
MACRO
To exit, press the M button.
10.
button).
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
To exit, press the M button.
5.
OVERWRITING STEPS IN MACRO PROGRAMS
ERASING STEPS OF MACRO PROGRAMS
When finished, to change another macro program,
press the OK cursor button to return to the menu,
and then repeat the procedure for steps 2 to 4.
This example shows how to change the macro
programmed to M-01 from
DVD → PLAY → AMP → AUTO
to
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
This example shows how to delete the TV and
INPUT steps from the following macro programmed
to M-01.
The program is changed from
1.
2.
more.
The menu is displayed.
Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.
DVD → PLAY → TV → INPUT.
DVD → PLAY → TIME → TV → INPUT → AMP →
The macro menu is displayed.
MACRO
LEARN
4
6
7
AUTO
The
indicator displays and
blinks.
to
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .
3.
4.
DVD → PLAY → TIME → AMP → AUTO.
Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button .
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
1
4
2
5
3
The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is
7
indicated by
.
&
The programmed section is indicated by
.
PAGE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
1
2
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is
displayed.
5.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
more.
USE
PAGE
Press the MEMO button.
PAGE
1
2
PAGE
1
1
2
6.
7.
The menu is displayed.
Press the TV source button.
TV blinks for 0.5 seconds
6
Press the D4 (MACRO) direct button.
The macro menu is displayed.
Press the D1 (INPUT) direct button.
8.
MACRO
LEARN
The
indicator displays and
blinks.
INPUT blinks for 0.5 seconds.
TV and INPUT are inserted.
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button.
3.
4.
NAME
NAME
NAME
MACRO
MACRO
MACRO
Press the D5 (EDIT) direct button.
Press the OK cursor button.
• To check the modified steps, press the 1or
2cursor button.
9.
The LCD displays DVD, and the step position is
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
1
2
PAGE
1
2
9
indicated by
.
&
The programmed section is indicated by
.
To exit, press the M button.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
10.
1.
Press the 2 cursor button so that AMP is
displayed.
5.
When finished, to change another macro program,
more.
press the
and then repeat the procedure for steps 3 to 9.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
OK cursor button to return to the menu,
The menu is displayed.
64
SETTING THE MACRO TIMER
EXECUTING THE MACRO TIMER
Place the receiver sensor of the receiving
remote control (top) so that it is facing the
transmitter of the transmitting remote control
(top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).
Once copying is completed, press the M button
on both remote controls.
1.
2.
10.
Setting the macro timer enables the macro program
to automatically turn the power for a device on or off
or perform other operations.
In the settings, you can select to execute the macro
timer everyday or only once.
Be sure to set the clock to the correct time before
using the timer. The macro timer can only be set for
one program a day.
This example shows how to use the timer only once
at 20:35 to execute a macro programmed to M-01.
The macro program starts when the time that was
set is reached. The TIMER
whenever the macro timer is activated.
indicator lights up
COPYING BY SOURCE
Note:
Hold down the M button of the transmitting
The 12 sources can be copied on a source by source
basis. You can select from up to 12 source types.
remote control for three seconds or more.
• To execute the macro timer, place the remote
control facing the infrared sensor of the device to
be operated. If the remote control is not in a suitable
position, it may not operate the device properly.
The menu is displayed.
<Receiving remote control>
Press the > button to display the fourth page
CLONE menu.
3.
4.
5.
6
7
8
Press the D3 (TX) direct button.
The transmitting side is now ready.
2
3
4
LEARN
CLONE MODE
Hold down the M button of the receiving remote
control for three seconds or more.
CREATING COPIES USING CLONE MODE
The menu is displayed.
PAGE
1
2
3
4
PAGE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
All of the codes programmed to the RC8001SR
remote control can be copied to another RC8001SR
using a few simple operations.
Press the > button to display the fourth page
CLONE menu.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Place the receiver sensor of the receiving
remote control (top) so that it is facing the
transmitter of the transmitting remote control
(top) at a distance of about 5 cm (2 inches).
1.
2.
USE
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
Press the D1 (RX) direct button.
• The remote control can copy the entire contents or
the contents for specific source buttons.
The receiving side is now ready.
5
6
Press the OK cursor button on the receiving
remote control.
• When copying the entire contents, all programmed
codes, modified names, programmed macros, and
signal transmission intervals are copied.
Hold down the M button of the transmitting
remote control for three seconds or more.
LEARN
MACRO
LEARN
MACRO
Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting
The menu is displayed.
When copying the contents for source buttons,
the programmed codes and modified names are
copied.
remote control.
Press the > button to display the fourth page
CLONE menu.
3.
4.
5.
6.
When copying is started, the bar indicators on both
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
3
LCDs start to move from the left to the right.
1
2 3
Press the D3 (TX) direct button.
• When the copying operation is completed,
TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the
transmitting remote control, and RX OK
is displayed on the LCD of the receiving
remote control.
Note:
The transmitting side is now ready.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
• The clone function can only be used for copying
when using the same model (RC8001SR) for both
the transmitting and receiving remote control.
Hold down the M button of the receiving remote
control for three seconds or more.
more.
The menu is displayed.
Press the > button to display the fourth page
CLONE menu.
Press the > button to display the third page
TIMER menu.
2.
3.
COPYING ENTIRE CONTENTS
• Do not touch either of the remote controls
during the copying operation. Doing so
could cause copying to fail.
Press the D2 (RX-S) direct button.
7.
8.
Press the D2 (ONCE?) direct button.
<Transmitting remote control>
The M-TMR menu is displayed on the LCD.
Press the source button to be copied.
The receiving side is now ready.
The name of the source which was pressed is
displayed on the LCD.
3
4
9
• To cancel timer operation, press CANCEL.
• If the copying fails in the middle of the
copying process, RX ERROR is displayed
on the receiving remote control. Check and
perform steps 1 to 7 again.
Press the D1 (M-01) direct button .
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
The time which is set previously is displayed.
• Each time the source button is pressed, the
name is displayed on the LCD.
NAME
Press the 2 and 0 numeric button to set the
hour indicator to 20.
• Copying takes about three minutes to
complete when the transmitting remote
control has been programmed to 100%
capacity.
Press the OK cursor button on the receiving
remote control.
9.
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
3
4
PAGE
1
2
1
2
3
4
Press the 3 and 5 numeric button to set the
minute indicator to 35.
Press the OK cursor button on the transmitting
10.
<Receiving remote control>
Press the OK cursor button.
remote control.
This finalizes the time.
When copying is started, the bar indicators on both
5
6
9
LCDs start to move from the left to the right.
To exit, press the M button.
To cancel the macro timer, return to the TIMER
• When the copying operation is completed,
TX OK is displayed on the LCD of the
transmitting remote control, and RX OK
is displayed on the LCD of the receiving
remote control.
menu and press the D5 (CANCEL) and then press
D1 (M-01).
PAGE
PAGE
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
• Do not touch either of the remote controls
during the copying operation. Doing so
could cause copying to fail.
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If the copying fails in the middle of the
copying process, ERROR is displayed on
the remote control.
ADJUSTING THE DISPLAY CONTRAST
Press the OK cursor button to enter the lighting
time.
5.
6.
The contrast of the LCD can be adjusted. Adjust
for maximum visibility according to your viewing
environment.
Once the setting is finished, press the M
button.
Check and perform steps 1 to 7 again.
Once copying is completed, press the M button
on both remote controls.
2
3
4
11.
SETTING THE MACRO INTERVAL TIME
When a macro program is executed, control signals
are transmitted in sequence. This transmission
interval (interval time) can be set in 0.5-seconds units
from 0.5 to 5 seconds.
LEARN
LEARN
SETUP
PAGE
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
If the interval time is set in this Setup mode, the
interval times for all programmed macros are
changed. If necessary, use EDIT (see page 64) in the
macro program to change the individual transmission
times.
SETTING THE LIGHTING TIME
• The LCD lights up when the LIGHT buttons are
pressed. The LCD remains lit while the pressed
button is held down, and it goes off when the
button is released.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
more.
The menu is displayed.
The factory default setting for the transmission
interval is 1 second.
Press the > button to display the second page
SETUP menu.
• The LCD continues to light up if another button
is pressed while it is lit or if pressed within two
seconds after the light goes off.
Press the D3 (CONT) direct button .
3.
4.
This example shows how to set the interval time to
5 seconds.
• The lighting time can be set in one-second units
from 0 to 60 seconds.
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button and set the
display contrast for maximum visibility.
2
3
4
The adjustment has 10 levels.
The LIGHT buttons have light-absorbing properties
that enable them to store light. If the buttons are no
longer illuminated in a dimly lit environment, bring the
buttons near a fluorescent lamp or other light source
for a sufficient amount of time. This should illuminate
the buttons again.
• The LIGHT buttons consist of a LIGHT1 and
LIGHT2 button, and they both perform the same
operation.
The factory default setting for the contrast is the fifth
level.
LEARN
LEARN
Press the OK cursor button to enter the display
contrast.
5.
6.
PAGE
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Once the setting is finished, press the M
button.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
2.
The factory default lighting time is set to 15
seconds.
more.
The menu is displayed.
Press the > button to display the second page
SETUP menu.
This example shows how to set the lighting time to
20 seconds.
Press the D2 (I-TIME) direct button.
3.
4.
2
3
4
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the
interval time.
Holding down the cursor button fast-forwards the
LEARN
LEARN
time indicator.
Press the OK cursor button to enter the interval
time.
5.
6.
PAGE
1
2
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
Once the setting is finished, press the M
button.
Hold down the M button for three seconds or
1.
more.
The menu is displayed.
Press the > button to display the second page
SETUP menu.
2.
3.
4.
Press the D1 (LIGHT) direct button .
The LIGHT is displayed on the LCD
Press the 3 or 4 cursor button to set the
lighting time.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
REMEDY
Make the correct setting.
TROUBLESHOOTING
Can not select EX/ES mode.
Surround center= NONE has been
selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP
In case of trouble, check the following before calling for service:
1.
2.
3.
Are the connections made properly ?
Are you operating the unit properly following the user’s guide ?
Are the power amplifiers and speaker working properly ?
Use 5.1channel source.
Input signal is incompatible.
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input
signal or analog input signal.
Can not select Pro Logic IIx Input signal is incompatible.
mode.
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input
signal or analog input signal.
Can not select Neo:6 mode.
Can not select CSII mode.
No output to Subwoofer Out.
Input signal is incompatible.
Input signal is incompatible.
If the unit does not operate properly, check items shown in the following table.
If your trouble cannot be recovered with the remedy actions listed in the following table, malfunction of the
internal circuitry is suspected; immediately unplug the power cable and contact your dealer, nearest Marantz
authorized dealer or the Marantz Service Center in your country.
Use 2 channel Dolby Digital input signal, PCM input
signal or analog input signal.
Select Subwoofer = YES.
Subwoofer = NONE has been selected
in SETUP mode.
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
REMEDY
Be sure to perform digital connection, select digital
input, then play.
Noise is produced during Analog has been selected for input.
DTS-encoded CD or laser
disc play.
Connect the power plug to the outlet.
SR7001 cannot be turned The power plug is not connected.
up.
Cancel mute using the remote control unit.
No sound and picture are Mute is on.
output even when power is
Check the encoded channel on the source side.
A specific channel does not Nothing recorded on source.
produce output.
on.
See the connection diagram and connect the cables
correctly.
The input cable is not connected
correctly.
Correctly connect the indoor FM and AM antennas
to FM and AM antenna outlets.
FM or AM reception fails.
Antenna connection is incomplete.
Adjust the master volume.
Select correct position.
The master volume control is turned all
the way down.
Try changing location where the AM indoor antenna
is set up.
Noise is heard during AM Reception is affected by other electrical
reception. fields.
The function selector position is wrong.
Install an FM outdoor antenna.
Noise is heard during FM The radio waves from the broadcasting
reception. station are weak.
Disconnect the headphones. (Speakers will not
output sound when headphones are connected.)
No speaker output.
The headphones are connected to the
headphone jack.
Disconnecting power plug for long periods of time
will erase preset data. If that happens, input the
preset data again.
Cannot get programmed Preset data has been erased.
station when the PRESET
button is pressed.
Connect the cable correctly by referring to the
connection diagram.
Incorrect Audio or Video for Input cable connected incorrectly.
selected source.
Connect the cable correctly by referring to the
connection diagram.
Incorrect Audio from
channel.
a
Speaker cable connected incorrectly.
Replace all the batteries with new ones.
Control with the remote Batteries are consumed.
control unit fails.
Select different position from which equipment will
be controlled.
Remote controller's function-key setting
is wrong.
Connect the cable correctly.
No Audio output from the The center speaker cable connection is
center channel speaker.
incomplete.
Move closer to this SR7001.
Remove offending object.
Disconnect the headphones.
The distance between this SR7001 and
the remote commander is too far.
When STEREO is selected for Surround mode, no
sound will be output from the center speaker. Set
another Surround mode.
STEREO has been selected for Surround
mode.
Something is blocking SR7001 and the
remote commander.
Make the correct setting.
Center = NONE has been selected in
SETUP mode.
Auto Setup (SPEAKER Headphones are connected.
SETUP) is not working.
Connect the cable correctly.
No Audio output from the The surround speaker cable connection
surround speakers.
is incomplete.
Note:
When STEREO has been selected for Surround
mode, no sound will be output from the surround
speaker. Set another Surround mode.
STEREO has been selected for Surround
mode.
• After “PROTECT” appears on the unit’s display, the standby indicator may start flashing. If it does, there is a
problem in the unit or the connection. If this problem reoccurs even when power is activated from the remote control
unit, call for servicing.
Make the correct setting.
Surround = NONE has been selected in
SETUP mode.
Connect the cable correctly.
No Audio output from the The surround back speaker cable
surround back speakers.
connection is incomplete.
Set surround mode EX/ES.
Make the correct setting.
Surround mode is not EX/ES mode.
Surround back = NONE has been
selected in SPEAKERS SIZE SETUP
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
HDMI
TROUBLESHOOTING
If a problem should arise, first check the following.
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
REMEDY
1. Are the connections correct?
The display does not The connected monitor or projector
appear over an HDMI does not support HDCP.
connection.
2. Have you operated the receiver according to the operating instructions?
3. Are the speakers and other components operating properIy?
The HDMI input of on the TV is Set HDMI input so that it turns on, as
not on. explained in the TV's instruction manual.
If this unit is not operating properly, Check the items listed in the table beIow. Should the problem persist, there
may be a malfunction. Disconnect the power immediately and contact your store of purchase.
The HDMI output on the source Set HDMI output so that it turns on, as
component (DVD, Set Top Box, explained in the source component's
SYMPTOM
CAUSE
REMEDY
etc.) is not on.
instruction manual.
“ANTENNA” is displayed.
XM terminal and the XM Connect-and- Check that the connection are correct.
Play antenna or Passport system is not
properly connected.
The HDMI mode is not correctly Set HDMI input on the FUNC INPUT
set on the SR7001/SR8001. SETUP menu as explained on page 25.
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed.
The signal cannot be received.
Reposition your XM Connect-and-Play
antenna.
The HDMI output video resolution Set the resolution so that it matches, as
of the source component (DVD, explained in the instruction manuals of both
Set Top Box, etc.) does not match components.
Receiving only XM channels 0 and 1.
The XM Tuner is not activated.
Contact XM Radio.
the TV specifications.
The device is connected with a A 5 m or shorter cable is recommended to
non-standard HDMI cable.
ensure stable operation and prevent image
quality deterioration.
Power to the SR7001/SR8001 is Turn on the power to the SR7001/
off. (When the SR7001/SR8001 SR8001.
is on standby, HDMI connections
cannot be turned on.)
The connection between Shut off and then turn the power back on
HDMI components was not to the SR7001/SR8001, TV and source
authenticated.
component.
Time is needed for the The connection is being There is nothing wrong with the system.
display of an HDMI authenticated between the HDMI Some HDMI devices require time for
connection to appear.
devices.
authentication.
Audio is not played The HDMI audio output of the Set the HDMI audio output so that it turns
back over an HDMI source component (DVD, Set on, as explained in the source component's
connection.
Top Box, etc.) is not on.
instruction manual.
The signal format of the source Set the HDMI audio output so that it
component (DVD, Set Top Box, can connect to the SR7001/SR8001,
etc.) is not supported by the as explained in the source component's
SR7001/SR8001.
instruction manual.
The SR7001/SR8001 is set to In the “THROUGH” mode, sound is not
the HDMI audio “THROUGH” produced from the SR7001/SR8001. Set it
mode.
to “ENABLE”. (see page 36)
DVD-Audio is not played The DVD player does not support • Use a DVD-Audio player that supports
back over an HDMI CPPM, therefore it cannot output
connection. HDMI audio.
CPPM.
• Turn on PCM downsampling on the DVD
player.
• Use an analog connection.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
GENERAL MALFUNCTION
HDMI
ACCESSORIES
If the equipment malfunctions, this may be because
an electrostatic discharge or AC line interference has
corrupted the information in the equipment memory
circuits. Therefore:
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS
FM TUNER SECTION
Version...........................................................1.2 [INPUT]
...........................................................1.1 [OUTPUT]
Remote Control Unit RC8001SR................................... 1
Microphone................................................................... 1
AAA-size batteries ........................................................ 3
FM Antenna ................................................................... 1
AM Loop Antenna .......................................................... 1
Front AUX Jack Cover .................................................. 1
AC cable ....................................................................... 1
GENERAL
Power Requirement................................AC 120 V 60 Hz
Power Consumption .................................6.3A (SR7001)
..........................................................6.5A (SR8001)
Weight..................................33.1 lbs (15.0 Kg) (SR7001)
.....................................33.1 lbs (15.0 Kg) (SR8001)
-
-
disconnect the plug from the AC line supply
after waiting at least three minutes, reconnect
the plug to the AC line supply
Frequency Range ................................87.5 – 108.0 MHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................IHF 1.8 µV/16.4 dBf
Signal to Noise Ratio ................... Mono/Stereo 75/70 dB
Distortion......................................Mono/Stereo 0.2/0.3 %
Stereo Separation.........................................1 kHz 45 dB
Alternate Channel Selectivity................. 300 kHz 60 dB
Image Rejection.........................................98 MHz 70 dB
Tuner Output Level ........... 1 kHz, 75 kHz Dev 800 mV
Specifications subject to change without prior notice.
-
re-attempt to operate the equipment
Memory backup
• In case a power outage occurs or the power
cord is accidentally unplugged, the SR7001
is equipped with a backup function to prevent
memory data such as the preset memory
from being erased.
DIMENSIONS
AM TUNER SECTION
Frequency Range ................................... 520 – 1710 kHz
Signal to Noise Ratio ..............................................50 dB
Usable Sensitivity .........................................Loop 400µV
Distortion...................................400Hz, 30 % Mod. 0.5 %
Selectivity................................................. 20 kHz 70 dB
HOW TO RESET THE UNIT
AUDIO SECTION
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
SR7001
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)
Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch
Center................................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch
Surround L&R....................................8 ohms 110 W / Ch
Surround Back L&R...........................8 ohms 110 W / Ch
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V-OFF PEAK ATT
ANALOG
DIGITAL
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
AAC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
DOWN
UP
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
MIC
Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch
Center................................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch
Surround L&R....................................6 ohms 140 W / Ch
Surround Back L&R...........................6 ohms 140 W / Ch
Should the operation or display seem to be abnormal,
reset the unit with the following procedure.
SR8001
The SR7001 is turned on, press and hold the MULTI
+ SPEAKERS A/B buttons simultaneously for 3
seconds or more.
Remember that the procedure will reset the settings
of the function selector, Surround mode, delay time,
TUNER PRESET etc., to their initial settings.
Power Output (20 Hz – 20 kHz/THD=0.08%)
Front L&R ..........................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch
Center................................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch
Surround L&R....................................8 ohms 125 W / Ch
Surround Back L&R...........................8 ohms 125 W / Ch
Front L&R ..........................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch
Center................................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch
Surround L&R....................................6 ohms 160 W / Ch
Surround Back L&R...........................6 ohms 160 W / Ch
17-5/16 ins. (440 mm)
Input Sensitivity/Impedance...............168 mV/ 47 Kohms
Signal to Noise Ratio(Analog Input / Pure Direct) ....105 dB
Frequency Response
AV SURROUND RECEIVER SR8001
READY
INPUT SELECTOR
VOLUME
PURE DIRECT
SURROUND
DIGITAL
DISP
MULTI
AUTO
TUNED
DIRECT
ST SPKR
DISC 6.1
A
B
V
-
O
F
F
P
E
A
K
A
T
T
ANALOG
DIGITAL
(Analog Input / Pure Direct)
SLEEP
AUTO SURR
MT
X
6.
1
NIGHT
EQ
L
C
LFE
S
R
A
AC
PCM
SL
SR
DSD
DOWN
UP
...........................................8 Hz – 100 kHz ( 3 dB)
(Digital Input / 96 kHz PCM)
............................................ 8 Hz – 45 kHz ( 3 dB)
SURROUND
MODE
MULTI
SPEAKER
AUTO
MULTI
BAND
T-MODE
MEMORY
CLEAR
7.1CH INPUT
DISPLAY
SPEAKERS
A/B
PURE DIRECT
THX
MultEQ
MIC
STANDBY
ENTER
MENU
EXIT
AUX
S-VIDEO
1
INPUT
VIDEO
DIGITAL
L
AUDIO
R
POWER ON/STANDBY
PHONES
VIDEO
Television Format....................................................NTSC
Input Level/Impedance ...........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms
Output Level/Impedance.........................1 Vp-p/75 ohms
Video Frequency Response .......5 Hz to 8 MHz (– 1 dB)
Video Frequency (Component) ....5 Hz to 80 MHz (– 1 dB)
S/N..........................................................................60 dB
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
RECEIVER/TUNER
CABLE
SATELLITE
SETUP CODES
AMPLIFIER
Source button name : AMP,TUNER
Source button name : AUX1
Source button name : DSS
Brand name
Harman/ Kardon
Integra
Setup code
Brand name
GoldStar
Hamlin
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
0137, 1331
0171
Canal+
0880
Source button name : AMP
0162, 1325
0036, 0300
Chaparral
Citycom
Connexions
Crossdigital
Cyrus
0243
Brand name
Amstrad
Arcam
Setup code
JBL
0137, 1333
Instrument
Jerrold
0030
1203
0105
JVC
0101, 0558, 1401, 1522
0503, 0837, 0303, 0030
0423
0296
KLH
1417, 1439
LG
0171
1136
Audiolab
Carver
0296
Kenwood
MCS
1340, 1054
MNet
0470
0227
0296
0066
Memorex
Motorola
NTL
0027
D-box
0750, 1154
GE
0105
Magnavox
Marantz
Micromega
Musicmagic
Myryad
NAD
1216, 1296, 0558, 1116
0503, 0837, 0303, 1133
DMT
1102
Genexxa
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
JVC
0422
1216, 0066, 1116, 1316
1095
0844
1095
0030
DNT
0227, 0423
0296
1216
Noos
Daeryung
Daewoo
Digenius
DirecTV
0423
0919
1116
Ono
1323
0358
1216
PVP Stereo
Visual Matrix
Pace
0326
Left Coast
Linn
0919
0347
0419, 0593, 0666, 1169, 0274, 0776, 1776, 0751,
0846, 1883, 1103, 1136
0296
Norcent
Onkyo
1416
0264, 1087, 1095
Magnavox
Marantz
Micromega
Myryad
0296
0162, 0869, 1325
Panasonic
Paragon
Philips
0027, 0035, 0134
Dish Network System 1032, 0802
0919, 0296
0296
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
1050, 0558
0027
DishPro
Distratel
Dream Multimedia
Echostar
Engel
1032, 0802
1545, 0066, 1315, 1790
0332, 0344
0111
0296
1216, 1296, 1116, 1293, 1295, 1310, 1316
Pioneer
Pulsar
0904, 1904, 0171, 0560
1264
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
0422
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Proscan
Quasar
RCA
1050, 0041, 0558, 1411
0027
1032, 0802, 0194, 0423, 0637, 0880, 0898, 1113
0335
1316
Quasar
Regal
0027
1044
0919, 0296
0040
1281
0306, 0300
Expressvu
FTE
0802
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Realistic
Revox
0066
Runco
0027
0890
0919, 0296
0422
1050, 1636, 1281, 0558, 1417
Sagem
0844
Finlux
0482
Saba
0558
Samsung
Scientific Atlanta
Sony
0027, 0171
Fracarro
Fuba
0898
0296
Sansui
1116
0904, 1904, 0504, 0035
0423
Sony
0247
Schneider
Sony
0558
1033
GE
0593
Soundesign
Technics
Thorens
Victor
0105
1085, 0185, 1185, 1685, 1785
Starcom
Supercable
TS
0030
GOI
0802
0335
Stereophonics
Sunfire
1050
0303
Galaxis
0890, 1138
0296
1340
0030
General Instrument 0896
0358
Teac
1417
Tele+1
0470
Gold Box
Grundig
0880
Wards
0105, 0040
0381
Technics
Telefunken
Thomson
Thorens
Uher
1335, 1545, 0066, 1336
Telewest
Torx
1095
0200, 0874
0802
Yamaha
0558
0030
HTS
1281
Toshiba
Trans PX
United Cable
Zenith
0027
Hirschmann
Hitachi
0200, 0423
0846, 0482
1169, 0776, 1776
1216
0303
RECEIVER/TUNER
0558
0030
Hughes
Venturer
Victor
1417
0027, 0552, 0926
Network Systems
Humax
Source button name : AMP,TUNER
0101
0890, 1203
Brand name
Setup code
Wards
0185, 0041
0203, 1203, 1358
InVideo
0898
ADC
0558
SATELLITE
Yamaha
JVC
0802
Aiwa
1432, 0185, 1116, 1415, 1668
Kathrein
Kreiselmeyer
Labgear
Logix
0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248
Alco
1417
1636
1284
1216
1216
1417
1256
1397
Source button name : DSS
0200
Anam
Brand name
Setup code
CABLE
1323
Apex Digital
Audiolab
Audiotronic
Audiovox
Bose
@sat
1327
1044
Source button name : AUX1
ABsat
0150
Lorenzen
Magnavox
Manhattan
Marantz
MediaSat
Memorex
Metronic
Mitsubishi
Motorola
Myryad
0326
Brand name
Setup code
0030, 0035
0926
Alba
0482
0751, 0749
0482, 1044, 1110
0227
ABC
AlphaStar
Amstrad
Aston
0799
Americast
Bell South
0874
Cambridge
Soundworks
Capetronic
Carver
0926
0169, 1156
0200
0880
Birmingham Cable 0303
Communications
Astro
0751
0558
Atsat
1327
0111
1216, 1116
1284
British Telecom
Cable & Wireless
Daeryung
0030
Avalon
0423
0776
Centrex
Denon
1095
Blaupunkt
British Sky
Broadcasting
Canal Digital
Canal Satellite
0200
0896
1387
0904, 1904, 0504, 0035
0874, 1202
0227
Ferguson
Fine Arts
Grundig
0558
Director
0503
0470
Next Level
0896
1216
Filmnet
0880
0880
1216
General
0503, 0837, 0303,
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
SATELLITE
TAPE DECK
CD/CD-R PLAYER
TV
Source button name : DSS
Source button name :TAPE
Source button name : CD, CDR, MD
Source button name :TV
Brand name
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
Brand name
Genexxa
Goodmans
Grundig
Harman/ Kardon
Hitachi
JVC
Setup code
Brand name
MARANTZ
TV1 (TV, VDP)
MARANTZ
TV2 (Plasma)
AGB
Setup code
Nokia
0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750
Aiwa
0056
0056
0056
0056
0056
0056
0056
0054
0056
0054
0056
0054
0056
0056
0270
0056
0054
0059, 0332
0001
OctalTV
Orbitech
Pace
1032
Carver
0332
1127
Grundig
Harman/Kardon
Magnavox
Marantz
Myryad
Optimus
Philips
0184
0002
0543
0482, 0874, 1202, 1350
0184, 0200
Panasonic
Panda
0274, 0728, 0874, 1347
0059
0482
0099
AOC
0478, 0120, 0207, 0087, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0119,
Paysat
0751
Kenwood
Krell
0708, 0653, 0055, 0064
0135
Philips
1169, 0776, 1776, 0751, 1103, 0749, 0160, 0227,
0184
ASA
0131
0482, 0880
LXI
0332
AWA
0036
Pioneer
Promax
Proscan
RCA
0880
Pioneer
Polk Audio
RCA
Linn
0184
Acura
0036
0482
MCS
0056
Addison
Admiral
Advent
0119, 0135, 0680
0419, 0593
Magnavox
Marantz
Matsui
0184, 0332
0120, 0490, 0190
0419, 0593, 0882, 0170
Revox
0653, 0056, 0184
0788
RFT
0227
Sansui
0184
Aiko
0119
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
0896
Sony
Memorex
Meridian
Micromega
Miro
0332
Akai
0839, 0729, 0057, 0036, 0235, 0388, 0543
0227
Thorens
Wards
0184
Akura
0291
0423
0184
Alba
0036, 0064, 0398, 0695
SKY
0883, 0874, 1202
1227
0027
America Action
Ampro
0207
SM Electronic
Sabre
Mission
Myryad
NAD
0184
0778
LASER DISK
0482
0184
Amstrad
Anam
0198, 0036, 0064, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543
Sagem
0847, 1141, 1280
1303, 1136, 1044, 1319
1327
0027
0277, 0207, 0036
Source button name : AUX2
Samsung
Sat Control
Satstation
Schwaiger
Seemann
Siemens
Sony
NSM
0184
Anam National
Anitech
Apex Digital
Audiosonic
Audiovox
Bang & Olufsen
Basic Line
Baur
0277, 0677
Brand name
Setup code
0091
0086
0091
0086
0086
0086
0086
0091
0086
0091
0228
0086
Naim
0184
0036
Carver
1110
Onkyo
0895
0775, 0792, 0794
Denon
1138
Optimus
Panasonic
Philips
0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332
0064, 0136
Marantz
Mitsubishi
NAD
0423
0056
0478, 0207, 0119, 0650
0200
0653, 0184
0059, 0332
0184
0592
0666, 1666, 0874
0896
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Proton
0036
Nagsmi
Optimus
Philips
Star Choice
Strong
0064, 0388, 0539
1327
0184
Baysonic
Beaumark
Beko
0207
TPS
0847, 1280
0482
QED
0184
0205
Pioneer
Salora
Tantec
Quad
0184
0397, 0513, 0741, 0742
TechniSat
Telestar
Thomson
Topfield
Toshiba
UltimateTV
Uniden
1126, 1127
1127
Quasar
RCA
0056
Bell & Howell
Beon
0181
Sony
0059, 0206, 0332
0206
0064
Telefunken
0482, 0880, 1073, 1318
1233
Realistic
Revox
Blaupunkt
Blue Sky
Bondstec
Bradford
Brandt
0222
0184
0695, 1064
0776, 1776, 0817
0419, 0666
0751, 0749
0200
Rotel
0184
0274
CD/CD-R PLAYER
SAE
0184
0207
Source button name : CD, CDR, MD
Sansui
Sanyo
0184, 0332
0206
0136, 0362
Brand name
Setup code
Universum
Ventana
Wisi
Broksonic
Bush
0263, 0490
Aiwa
0184
0227
Scott
0332
0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064
Arcam
0184
0200, 0423, 0482
0150
Sears
0332
CCE
0064
Audio Research
AudioTon
Audiolab
Audiomeca
Cairn
0184
XSat
Sharp
0888, 0064
0184
CGE
0274
0184
Zehnder
Zenith
1102
Simaudio
Sonic Frontiers
Sony
CTC
0274
0184
0883, 1883
0184
CXC
0207
0184
0517, 0027
0332
Candle
0057
0184
Symphonic
Carnivale
Carver
0057
California Audio Labs 0056
TAG McLaren
0184
0081, 0197
0036
Carver
0184, 0206
Tandy
0059
Cascade
Cathay
Cyrus
0184
0027
0184
0900
0206
0332
0206
Technics
Thorens
Thule
0056
0064
DKK
0184
Celebrity
Celera
0027
DMX Electronics
Denon
0184
0792
Universum
Victor
0184
Centurion
Changhong
Ching Tai
0064
Dynamic Bass
Emerson
Fisher
0099
0792
Wards
0184
0036, 0119
ii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV
TV
TV
TV
Source button name :TV
Source button name :TV
Source button name :TV
Source button name :TV
Brand name
Chun Yun
Chung Hsin
Cimline
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
Brand name
Kathrein
Kendo
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
0027, 0207, 0036, 0119
GE
0074, 0078, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0119,
0583
Onwa
0207, 0460
0207, 0080, 0135
0587, 1174, 1374
0064
Optimus
Optonica
Orion
0181, 0277, 0193, 0677
0036
GEC
0064, 0543
Kenwood
Kneissel
Kolin
0057
0120
Cineral
0478, 0119
Gateway
Geloso
1782, 1783
0286, 0462
0263, 0490, 0064, 0347, 0543
Citizen
0087, 0057, 0119
0036
0207, 0080, 0135
Osaki
0291, 0439
Clarion
0207
Genexxa
Gibralter
GoldStar
Goodmans
Gorenje
Gradiente
Graetz
0190
Korpel
0064
Otto Versand
Palladium
Panama
Panasonic
Pathe Cinema
Pausa
0064, 0347, 0539, 0583
Clarivox
Clatronic
Condor
0064
0044, 0057
Koyoda
L&S Electronic
LG
0036
0397, 0445
0274, 0397
0181, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0136, 0404
0835
0291
0347, 0397
0064, 0398, 0401, 0661
0087, 0057, 0205, 0064, 0135, 0741
0081, 0277, 0078, 0064, 0190, 0677, 1437
Conrac
0835
0397
LXI
0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205
0265, 0347
Contec
0207, 0036
0080, 0197
Leyco
0064, 0291
0036
Craig
0207
0190, 0388
Liesenk & Tter
Loewe
0064
Penney
0074, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0057, 0205, 1374
Crosley
Crown
0081
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
Grunpy
0064, 0235, 0366, 0543
0539
Perdio
0347
0207, 0036, 0064, 0397, 0445
0637
Luxor
0383, 0388
Philco
0081, 0490, 0207, 0057, 0205, 0172, 1688, 0064,
Curtis Mathes
0074, 0081, 0181, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0729, 0057,
0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614
M Electronic
0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373,
0274
0172, 0193, 1174, 1374
0207
0401, 0507
Philips
0081, 0027, 0078, 0057, 0205, 1481, 0064, 0119,
Daewoo
0181, 0478, 0207, 0057, 0205, 1688, 0036, 0064,
HCM
0036, 0439
MGA
0177, 0057, 0205
0135, 0401, 0583, 0717
0119, 0135, 0197, 0401, 0650, 0661
Hallmark
Hankook
Hanseatic
Hantarex
Harman/Kardon
Harvard
Havermy
Hello Kitty
Hinari
0205
MTC
0087, 0057, 0539
Phonola
Pilot
0064
Dansai
Dayton
De Graaf
Decca
Denon
Digatron
Dixi
0064
0207, 0057, 0205
Magnadyne
Magnafon
Magnavox
Manesth
Mark
0274, 0543
0057
0036
0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583
0543
Pioneer
Portland
Prandoni-Prince
Prima
0193, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893
0235, 0575
0543
0081, 0057, 1481, 1281
0119
0064, 0543
0081
0291, 0347
0543
0172
0207
0064
0788
0064
0120
Matsui
0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543
Prism
0078
0036, 0064
0478
Matsushita
Mediator
Medion
0277, 0677
Profex
0036, 0388
Dumont
Dwin
0044
0036, 0064
0064
Proscan
Protech
Proton
0074
0747, 0801
Hisawa
0482
0695, 0835, 1064
0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695
ECE
0064
Hitachi
0057, 0205, 1172, 0172, 1283, 0036, 0119,
Megatron
Memorex
Metz
0205, 0172
0057, 0205, 0036
Elbe
0286
0132,0136, 0190, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605
0181, 0277, 0490, 0177, 0205, 0036, 1064
Pulsar
0044
Electroband
Elin
0027
Hua Tun
Huanyu
Hypson
ICE
0036
0474
Quasar
Quelle
0277, 0078, 0677
0064, 0575
0401
Micromaxx
Microstar
Midland
Minerva
Minoka
0835
0064, 0131, 0388, 0539
Elite
0347
0064, 0291
0835
R-Line
0064
Elta
0036
0291, 0398
0074, 0044, 0078
RCA
0074, 0027, 0057, 0205, 1474, 1481, 0117, 0119,
Emerson
Envision
Epson
Erres
0181, 0263, 0490, 0207, 0205, 0388, 0650
ITS
0398
0514
0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1574
0057, 0840
ITT
0190, 0388, 0575
0439
RFT
0455
0860
Imperial
Indiana
Infinity
Ingelen
Inno Hit
Innova
Inteq
0274, 0397, 0445
Mitsubishi
0181, 0277, 0120, 0263, 0207, 0177, 1277, 0057,
RadioShack
Radiola
Radiomarelli
Realistic
Rediffusion
Reoc
0074, 0181, 0207, 0057, 0205
0064
0064
0205, 0135, 0539, 0863
0064
Ether
0057, 0036
0081
Mivar
0318, 0319, 0543, 0636
0543
Etron
0036
0190
Motorola
Multitech
Myryad
NAD
0120
0181, 0207, 0057, 0205
Europhon
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
0543
0543
0207, 0036
0388
0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587
0064
0583
0741
0388
0044
0183, 0205, 0388, 0893
Revox
Rex
0064
0235, 0373
Interfunk
Intervision
JBL
0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539
NEC
0181, 0183, 0078, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0197, 0482,
0190, 0286, 0291
0036, 0291, 0445
0044, 0057, 0524, 0630
0064
0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543
0263, 0036
0064, 0291, 0404
0524, 1731
Roadstar
Runco
SBR
Firstar
Firstline
Fisher
0081
NEI
0064
0036, 0274, 0695
0181, 0131, 0235, 0397
0482
JCB
0027
NTC
0119
JVC
0490, 0080, 0398, 0680, 0710
Neckermann
Netsat
0064, 0583
SEG
0291, 0695
0543
Flint
Jean
0183, 0078, 0263, 0036, 0119
0064
SEI
Formenti
Fortress
Frontech
Fujitsu
Funai
0064, 0347
Jensen
KEC
0788
Newave
Nikkai
0120, 0205, 0036, 0119
0064, 0291
SKY
0064
0120
0207
SSS
0207
0190, 0274, 0291
0710, 0836
KTV
0207, 0057
0036
Nikko
0057, 0205, 0119
0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658
0775, 0851
Saba
0136, 0190, 0314, 0362
0265
Kaisui
Kapsch
Karcher
Nokia
Saccs
Sagem
Saisho
Salora
0207, 0198, 0291
0207
0190
Norcent
Nordmende
Oceanic
0637
Futuretech
0637
0136, 0314, 0587
0190, 0388
0036, 0291, 0543
0190, 0383, 0388, 0575
iii
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
TV
TV
VCR
VCR
Source button name :TV
Source button name :TV
Source button name :VCR
Source button name :VCR
Brand name
Sambers
Sampo
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
0543
Teac
0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064
Anam
0064, 0267, 0305, 0253, 0507
GEC
0108
0181, 0120, 0057, 0205, 0198, 0036, 0119, 0677,
Tec
0274
Anam National
Anitech
Asha
0253, 1589
Garrard
General
Go Video
GoldHand
GoldStar
Goodmans
Gradiente
Graetz
0027
1782
Technema
Technics
Techwood
Teco
0347
0099
0072
Samsung
0181, 0087, 0839, 0729, 0057, 0205, 0036, 0064,
0277, 0078, 0677
0267
0459
0117, 0119, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0793,
0078
Asuka
0064
0099
0841
0078, 0120, 0205, 0036, 0119, 0291, 0680
Audiovox
Baird
0064, 0305
0064, 0252, 0507, 1264
Sansei
0478
Teknika
Telefunken
Telemeister
Teletech
Tensai
0081, 0207, 0177, 0087, 0119
0027, 0131, 0068
0064, 0027, 0099, 0305
Sansui
0490
0729, 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652
Basic Line
Beaumark
Bell & Howell
Blaupunkt
Brandt
0099, 0305
0027
Sanyo
0181, 0207, 0131, 0235, 0366, 0826
0347
0267
0267, 0131, 0068
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scotch
0388
0036
0131
Granada
Grandin
Grundig
HCM
0108, 0131
0064, 0274, 0398, 0695
0347
0253
0064, 0027, 0099
0205
Tera
0057
0347
0108, 0099, 0253, 0374
Scott
0263, 0207, 0205
Thomson
Thorn
1474, 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652
Brandt Electronic
Broksonic
Bush
0068
0099
Sears
0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205, 0198
0064, 0131, 0388, 0539
0211, 0375, 1506
HI-Q
0074
Seleco
0190, 0286
Toshiba
0181, 0183, 0087, 1283, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859,
0099, 0305, 0379
Hanseatic
Harley Davidson
Harman/Kardon
Harwood
Hinari
0064
Semivox
Semp
0207
1383, 1683, 1731
CCE
0099, 0305
0027
0183
Triumph
Tuntex
0543
CGE
0027
0108
Sharp
0120, 0057, 0677
0057, 0036, 0119
Calix
0064
0099
Shen Ying
Sheng Chia
Siarem
Siemens
Sinudyne
Skantic
Skygiant
Skyworth
Solavox
Sonitron
Sonoko
Sonolor
Sontec
Sony
0036, 0119
Uher
0347
Canon
0062
0267, 0099, 0379
0064, 0267, 0027, 0069, 0068
0069
0120, 0263, 0036
Universum
Vector Research
Vestel
0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519
Carver
0108
Hitachi
0543
0057
Cimline
Cineral
0099
Hughes
Network Systems
Hypson
ITT
0064, 0222
0064
0305
0543
Victor
0277, 0080, 0677, 0680
Citizen
0064, 0305, 1305
0099
0383
Videosat
Vidikron
Vidtech
ViewSonic
Vision
0274
Colt
0099
0267, 0131, 0068
0064, 0305
0027
0207
0081
Combitech
Craig
0379
ITV
0064
0205
0064, 0074, 0267, 0099
Imperial
Interfunk
JVC
0190
1782
Crown
0099, 0305
0108
0235
0347
Curtis Mathes
Cybernex
Cyrus
0087, 0062, 0068, 1062
0072, 0094, 0068
0068
0036, 0064
Voxson
Waltham
Wards
0190
0267
Jensen
KEC
0190, 0235
0383
0108
0064, 0305
0099
0064
0081, 0057, 0205, 0893
0064, 0347
Daewoo
Dansai
0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305
KLH
1127, 0027, 0677, 0861, 1532, 1678
Watson
Waycon
0099
Kaisui
0099
Soundesign
Soundwave
Sowa
0207, 0205
0183
De Graaf
Decca
0069
Kenwood
Kodak
0094, 0068
0062, 0064
0070, 0068
0099
0064, 0445
White Westinghouse 0490, 0064, 0347,0650
0108, 0027
0183, 0078, 0087, 0205, 0119
Yamaha
Yapshe
Yoko
0057, 0796, 0860
0277
Denon
0069
Kolin
Squareview
Standard
Starlite
Stern
0198
Dual
0068
Korpel
0036
0064, 0291
Dumont
Dynatech
ESC
0108, 0027, 0131
LG
0064, 0072, 0069, 0507
0064
0207
Zenith
0044, 0490, 0205, 0119
0027
LXI
0190, 0286
0267, 0305
Lenco
0305
Supreme
Sylvania
Symphonic
Synco
0027
Elcatech
Electrohome
Electrophonic
Emerex
Emerson
0099
Leyco
0099
VCR
0081, 0057, 0198
0064
Lloyd’s
0027
0207, 0198
0064
Loewe
0064, 0108, 1589
0267, 0099
0075, 0131, 0070
0027
Source button name :VCR
0027, 0478, 0120, 0087, 0205, 0119
0059
Logik
Brand name
Setup code
Sysline
T + A
0064
0062, 0064, 0211, 0267, 0072, 0027, 0070, 0305,
Luxor
ASA
0064, 0108
0474
1305, 1506
M Electronic
MEI
Admiral
Adventura
Aiko
0075
TCM
0835
Ferguson
Fidelity
Finlandia
Finlux
Firstline
Fisher
Fuji
0068, 0347
0062
0027
TMK
0205
0027
MGA
0267, 0070
0267
0305
TNCi
0044
0108, 0131
MGN Technology
MTC
Aiwa
0064, 0027, 0334, 0375, 0379
TVS
0490
0108, 0027, 0069, 0131
0064, 0072, 0070, 0099
0074, 0131
0267, 0027
1305
Akai
0068, 0342
Tacico
0205, 0036, 0119
Magnasonic
Magnavox
Magnin
Manesth
Marantz
Marta
Akiba
0099
Tai Yi
0036
0062, 0066, 0108, 0027, 1808
0267
Alba
0099, 0305, 0342, 0379
Tandy
0120, 0190
0062, 0060
America Action
American High
Amstrad
0305
0062
0027
Tashiko
Tatung
0119, 0677
Fujitsu
Funai
0072, 0027
0072, 0099
0062, 0108
0064
0081, 0181, 0183, 0078, 0087, 0036, 0064, 0543
0027
GE
0087, 0062, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087
iv
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
VCR
VCR
VCR
DVD
Source button name :VCR
Source button name :VCR
Source button name :VCR
Source button name : DVD
Brand name
Setup code
Brand name
Realistic
Reoc
Setup code
Brand name
Thomson
Thorn
Setup code
Brand name
Setup code
Matsui
0375, 0379
0062, 0064, 0075, 0074, 0027, 0131
0087, 0094, 0068, 0347
JVC
0585, 0650
Matsushita
Medion
0062
0375
0131, 0068
KLH
0744
0375
ReplayTV
Rex
0641, 0643
Tivo
0645, 0663
Kenwood
Koss
0517, 0561
Memorex
0062, 0064, 0075, 0066, 0074, 0267, 0027, 0131,
0068
Toshiba
Totevision
Uher
0108, 0072, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0872
0678
0334, 0375, 1264
Roadstar
Runco
0064, 0267, 0099, 0305
0064, 0267
LG
0768
Memphis
Metz
0099
0066
0267
Limit
0795
0064, 0374, 1589
SBR
0108
Unitech
0267
Magnavox
Memorex
MiCO
0530, 0702
Minolta
Mitsubishi
Motorola
Multitech
Murphy
Myryad
NAD
0069
SEG
0267
Universum
Vector
0064, 0108, 0267, 0027
0858
0108, 0094, 0070, 0068, 0834
SEI
0108
0072
0750
0062, 0075
STS
0069
Victor
0094, 0068
Microsoft
Mintek
0549
0027, 0099
Saba
0068, 0347
Video Concepts
Videomagic
Videosonic
Villain
0072
0744
0027
Salora
0070
0064
Mitsubishi
Mustek
Nesa
0548
0108
Sampo
Samsung
Sanky
0064, 0075
0267
0757
0131
0267, 0072, 0459
0027
0744
NEC
0062, 0064, 0075, 0131, 0094, 0068
0075, 0066
Wards
0087, 0062, 0075, 0074, 0108, 0267, 0027, 0069,
0099
Onkyo
0530
National
Neckermann
Nesco
0253
Sansui
Sanyo
0027, 0094, 0068, 1506
Oritron
0678
0108
0074, 0267, 0131
White Westinghouse 0099
Palsonic
Panasonic
Philips
0699
0099
Saville
0379
XR-1000
Yamaha
Yamishi
Yokan
0062, 0027, 0099
0517, 0659, 1389
Newave
Nikko
0064
Schaub Lorenz
Schneider
Scott
0027, 0131, 0068
0068
0530, 0566, 0673, 0881
0064
0108, 0027, 0099
0099
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Proscan
Qwestar
RCA
0552, 0598, 0658, 0659
Noblex
0267
0211, 0072, 0070
0099
0566
Nokia
0267, 0131, 0068
Sears
0062, 0064, 0074, 0027, 0069, 0131, 1264
Yoko
0267
0549
Nordmende
Oceanic
Okano
0068, 0347
Seleco
Semp
0068
Zenith
0066, 0060, 0027, 1506
0678
0027, 0068
0072
0549, 0598, 0744
0650
0342, 0375
Sharp
0075, 0834
Rotel
DVD
Olympus
Optimus
Orion
0062, 0253
Shintom
Shogun
Siemens
Silva
0131, 0099
SM Electronic
Samsung
Sanyo
0757
0064, 0075, 0131, 0459
0267
0600
Source button name : DVD
0211, 0375, 0379, 1506
0064, 0108, 0131
0697
Brand name
MARANTZ DVD1
MARANTZ DVD2
Acoustic Solutions
Alba
Setup code
Osaki
0064, 0027, 0099
0064
Sharp
0657
0001
Otto Versand
Palladium
Panasonic
Pathe Marconi
Penney
Pentax
0108
Singer
0072, 0099
Sherwood
Shinsonic
Slim Art
Sony
0797
0002
0064, 0068, 0099
Sinudyne
Sonic Blue
Sontec
Sony
0108
0560
0757
0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589
0641, 0643
0811
0744
0068
0064
0560, 0891
0702
Amstrad
0740
0062, 0064, 0267, 0069, 1062, 1264
0062, 0059, 0060, 0027, 0663, 1259
Sylvania
Tatung
Apex Digital
Blaupunkt
Blue Parade
Bush
0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127
0069
Sunkai
Sunstar
Suntronic
Sylvania
Symphonic
TMK
0375
0797
0744
Perdio
0027
0027
Teac
0598, 0744
0517
0598
Philco
0062
0027
Technics
Theta Digital
Thomson
Toshiba
Urban Concepts
XBox
0740
Philips
0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208
0062, 0108, 0027, 0070, 1808
0598
Centrex
0699
Phonola
Pilot
0108
0027
0549
Clatronic
CyberHome
DVD2000
Daewoo
0815
0064
0267
0530
0741
Pioneer
Polk Audio
Profitronic
Proline
0108, 0069, 0094
Tandy
0027, 0131
0530
0548
0108
Tashiko
Diamond
Digitrex
Emerson
Tatung
Teac
0064, 0027
0549
0811, 0797
0797
0267
0795
Yamaha
Zenith
0517, 0566, 0572
0530, 0618, 0768
0811
Dansai
0027
0699
Decca
0797
Proscan
Protec
0087, 1087
0618
Zeus
Denon
0517
0099
0108, 0072, 0027, 0094, 0068
Enterprise
Fisher
0618
Pulsar
0066
0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669
0697
Pye
0108
Technics
Teco
0062, 0253
0062, 0064, 0075, 0068
0062, 0064, 0027
0068
GE
0549, 0744
0742
Quasar
Quelle
0062, 1062
Go Video
GoldStar
Gradiente
Greenhill
Grundig
0108
Teknika
Teleavia
Telefunken
Tenosal
Tensai
0768
RCA
0087, 0062, 0267, 0069, 0834, 1062, 1087
0678
RadioShack
Radiola
Radix
0027
0108
0064
0064
0068, 0347
0099
0744
0566
0027
Hitachi
0600, 0691
0699
Randex
Thomas
0027
Hiteker
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Source button name : DVD
Source button name :VCR
Source button name : MD
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 MENU
2 AUDIO
3 SUB-T
4 10+
Note
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 TV/VCR
2 2XPLAY
Note
SELECT TV/VCR
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 REPEAT
2 SHUFLE
3 DISP
Note
DIRECT BUTTON
FUNCTIONS
SELECTS MAIN MENU
SELECT LANGUAGES
SELECT SUB TITLE
DIGIT ENTRY +10
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE
SELECTS SETUP MENU
SELECTS ANGLE
ACTIVATES ON SCREEN DISPLAY
FAST FORWARD
REWIND
SELECTS REPEAT MODE
SELECTS SHUFFLE PLAY
SELECTS DISPLAY MODE
SELECT EDIT MODE
EJECT
TWICE NORMAL PLAYBACK
SPEED
Source button name : AMP
3 SLOW
4 STILL
5 EJECT
1 OTR
2 AUDIO
3 SKIP
4 FF
SLOW PLAYBACK SPEED
STILL FRAME
EJECT
4 EDIT
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 AUTO
2 2
Note
5 TRAY
1 SETUP
2 ANGLE
3 OSD
5 EJECT
1 SP/LP
2 DELETE
3 ENTER
4 FF
SELECT AUTO SURROUND
SELECT DOLBY MODE
SELECT DTS MODE
SELECT EX/ES
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
SELECTS SP/LP MODE
SELECTS DELETE
SELECTS ENTER
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
ONE TOUCH RECORDING
SELECT AUDIO MODE
SKIP TO NEXT PROG.MARKER
FAST FORWARD
3 DTS
4 EX/ES
5 DIRECT
1 MCH-ST
4 FF
5 REW
FAST FORWARD
REWIND
SELECT PURE DIRECT
SELECT MULTI CHANNEL
STEREO
5 REW
PAGE 2
1 SLOW
2 L-PLAY
3 SHUFLE
4 REPEAT
5 A/B
SLOW FORWARD
LAST PLAY
SHUFFLE PLAY
5 REW
1 VIS +
2 VIS-
3
REWIND
VHS INDEX SERCH NEXT
VHS INDEX SERCH PREVIOUS
1 MARKER
2 PROG
3 SYNC-R
4 CHAR
5
SELECTS AUTO MARKER
SELECTS PROGRAM MODE
SYNCRO REC
2 STEREO
3 VIRTUA
SELECT STEREO MODE
SELECT VIRTUAL MODE
REPEAT MODE
REPEAT A TO B
SELECTS CHARACTER MODE
II
4 CS-
II
SELECT CS- MODE
4
5 HT-EQ
1 NIGHT
2 BASS +
3 BASS -
4 TREB +
5TREB -
1 MULTI
2 M-SPKR
3 A/D
–
1 RETURN
2 T/C
3 3-D
RETURN TO MENU
TITLE AND CHAPTER
SURROUND ON/OFF
SELECTS TITLE MENU
ZOOM MODE ON/OFF
5
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
NIGHT MODE ON/OFF
BASS +
BASS -
Source button name : AUX 2
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 SHUFFL
2 REPEAT
3 MODE
4 SORT
5 MUTE
1 INPUT+
2 INPUT-
3
Note
Source button name : CDR
PAGE
PAGE 1
4 TITLE
5 ZOOM
Command
1 INPUT
2 INCR
Note
SELECT AUX1
SELECT AUX2
SELECT AUX3
SELECT NET
TREBLE +
TREBLE -
SELECT INPUT SOURCE
INCREMENTS TRACK No.
ACTIVATE SYNCRO
RECORDING
MULTI ROOM ON/OFF
MULTI SPEAKER ON/OFF
SELECT ANALOG/DIGITAL
VIDEO OFF
3 SYNC-R
Source button name : CD
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 DISC +
2 DISC -
3 SHUFLE
4 REPEAT
5 TRAY
Note
CD CHANGER NEXT DISC
CD CHANGER PREVIOUS DISC
SHUFFLE PLAY
4 PROG
5 TRAY
1 SCROLL
2 FINAL
3 BLANK
4 FF
ACTIVATE PROGRAM MODE
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE
SCROLL/RECALL
FINALIZES(WRITES TOC)
RECORDS BLANK
FAST FORWARD
PAGE 2
INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD
INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE
4 V-OFF
5 AUDIO
–
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
REPEAT
4
Source button name :TUNER
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE
ACTIVATE TEXT FUNCTION
AUTO MUSIC SCAN
SCROLL/RECALL
5
PAGE
PAGE 1
Command
1 FM
2 AM
Note
SELECT FM
SELECT AM
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
1 TEXT
2 AMS
5 REW
1 BLANK
2 REPEAT
3
REWIND
RECORDS BLANK
ACTIVATE REPEAT MODE
Source button name : AUX 1
PAGE
PAGE 1
3 SCROLL
4 FF
5 REW
Command
1 SHUFFL
2 REPEAT
3 MODE
4 SORT
5 MUTE
1 ALBUM+
2 ALBUM-
3 LIST+
4 LIST-
5
Note
3 XM/DAB
4 T-MODE
5 BAND
1 SCAN +
2 SCAN -
3 T-MODE
4 P-SCAN
5 P-INFO
1 DISP
SELECT XM RADIO
SELECT MONO/STEREO
SELECT RADIO BAND
FREQUENCY SCAN UP
FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN
SELECT MONO/STEREO
SELECT PRESET SCAN
SHOWPRESET INFORMATION
DISPLAY
FAST FORWARD
REWIND
SELECT SHUFFLE PLAY
SELECT REPEAT PLAY
CHANGE USER INTERFACE MODE
SORT DATA BASE
MUTE ON/OFF (TOGGLE)
NEXT ALBUM
1 DISC 1
2 DISC 2
3 DISC 3
4 DISC 4
5 DISC 5
1 UNIT
CD CHANGER DISC 1
CD CHANGER DISC 2
CD CHANGER DISC 3
CD CHANGER DISC 4
CD CHANGER DISC 5
SELECT UNIT No.
SELECT TITLE SEARCH
SELECT TRACK No.
SELECT CATEGORY
SELECT PLAY MODE
4
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
5
PAGE 2
PAGE 3
PAGE 4
Source button name :TAPE
PAGE
PAGE 1
PREVIOUS ALBUM
NEXT PLAY LIST
PREVIOUS PLAY LIST
Command
1 TAPE-A
2 TAPE-B
3 DIR
Note
SELECT TAPE DECK A
SELECT TAPE DECK B
AUTO REVERSE DIRECTION
TIME DISPLAY
2 TITL-S
3 TRACK
4 CATGRY
5 P-MODE
European 2 PTY
model only 3 AF
4 STM
RDS PTY
RDS ALTERNATE FREQEMCY
RDS STATION MODE
RDS DSR WAVE LANGUAGE
FREQUENCY SCAN UP
FREQUENCY SCAN DOWN
XM/RDS DISPLAY
1 ARTIST
2 ALBUM
3 SONG
4 GENRE
5 P-LIST
1 1 INPUT+
2 INPUT-
3
SORT ORDER (ARTIST)
SORT ORDER (ALBUM)
SORT ORDER (SONG)
4 TIME
5 TRAY
1 AMS
2
TRAY OPEN/CLOSE
AUTO MUSIC SCAN
5 DWR
1 SCAN +
PAGE 2
PAGE 4
SORT ORDER (GENRE)
SORT ORDER (PLAY LIST)
INPUT SELECTOR FORWARD
INPUT SELECTOR REVERSE
2 SCAN -
3 DISP
3
4 FF
FAST FORWARD
REWIND
4 CAT +
5 CAT -
CATEGORY SEARCH UP
CATEGORY SEARCH DOWN
5 REW
4
5
vi
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
You can find your nearest authorized distributor or dealer on our website.
is a registered trademark.
Printed in China
06/2006
00M05CW851250 ecmf-d
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|